Nikon Digital Camera 13456 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
User's Manual  
Nikon Manual Viewer 2  
Use the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app to view  
manuals anytime, anywhere on your smartphone or  
tablet.  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all  
instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read  
by all those who use the product.  
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following  
symbols and conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before  
use to prevent damage to the camera.  
D
A
0
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before  
using the camera.  
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.  
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are  
shown in bold.  
Camera Settings  
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.  
Nikon Manual Viewer 2  
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or  
tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime,  
anywhere. Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of  
charge from the App Store and Google Play. Download of the  
app and any product manuals requires an Internet  
connection, for which fees may be levied by your phone or  
Internet service provider.  
A For Your Safety  
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in  
“For Your Safety” (0 xiii–xvi).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Package Contents  
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.  
BM-12 monitor cover (0 10)  
BF-1B body cap (0 15, 436)  
D810 digital camera  
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover  
MH-25a battery charger (comes with either an AC wall  
adapter or power cable of a type and shape that varies  
with the country or region of sale; 0 13)  
USB cable clip (0 258)  
HDMI cable clip (0 269)  
UC-E22 USB cable (0 257, 263)  
User’s Manual (this guide)  
AN-DC12 strap (0 12)  
ViewNX 2 installer CD (0 253)  
Memory cards are sold separately. Cameras purchased in Japan display  
menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other languages are  
not supported. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Table of Contents  
Package Contents........................................................................... i  
For Your Safety............................................................................xiii  
Notices.........................................................................................xvii  
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera.......................................................1  
The Multi Selector .......................................................................11  
First Steps  
Camera Menus  
Using Camera Menus..........................................................................25  
Basic Photography and Playback 29  
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography..............................................29  
Basic Playback..............................................................................31  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs..................................................33  
Live View Photography  
Focus.........................................................................................................39  
Manual Focus.........................................................................................41  
Using the b Button ..............................................................................42  
The Live View Display: Live View Photography.........................45  
The Information Display: Live View Photography....................46  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movie Live View  
Indices...................................................................................................... 54  
Using the b Button.............................................................................. 55  
The Live View Display: Movie Live View ...................................... 57  
The Information Display: Movie Live View ................................. 58  
Image Area............................................................................................. 59  
Taking Photos During Movie Live View....................................... 60  
Movie Settings...................................................................................... 62  
Viewing Movies ...........................................................................65  
Editing Movies .............................................................................67  
Trimming Movies................................................................................. 67  
Saving Selected Frames .................................................................... 72  
Image Recording Options  
Image Area ...................................................................................74  
Image Quality...............................................................................79  
Image Size.....................................................................................83  
Using Two Memory Cards..........................................................86  
Focus  
Autofocus .....................................................................................87  
Autofocus Mode................................................................................... 87  
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 90  
Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 94  
Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 96  
Manual Focus.............................................................................100  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release Mode  
Choosing a Release Mode....................................................... 102  
Power Source and Frame Rate ..................................................... 104  
Self-Timer Mode (E) ................................................................ 106  
Mirror up Mode (V)............................................................... 108  
ISO Sensitivity  
Manual Adjustment ................................................................. 109  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control................................................... 111  
Exposure  
Metering..................................................................................... 114  
Exposure Mode ......................................................................... 116  
e: Programmed Auto ....................................................................... 118  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto................................................................... 119  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto................................................................ 120  
h: Manual.............................................................................................. 121  
Long Time-Exposures (h Mode Only) ................................... 123  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock ........................................ 126  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock.......................................................... 128  
Exposure Compensation......................................................... 130  
Bracketing.................................................................................. 133  
White Balance  
White Balance Options............................................................ 148  
Fine-Tuning White Balance .................................................... 151  
Choosing a Color Temperature.............................................. 155  
Preset Manual ........................................................................... 158  
Viewfinder Photography ................................................................ 159  
Live View (Spot White Balance).................................................... 163  
Managing Presets.............................................................................. 167  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Enhancement  
Picture Controls.........................................................................170  
Selecting a Picture Control.............................................................170  
Modifying Picture Controls ............................................................173  
Creating Custom Picture Controls...............................................177  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls.................................................180  
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows .....................182  
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................182  
High Dynamic Range (HDR)...........................................................184  
Flash Photography  
Using the Built-in Flash............................................................189  
Flash Modes.........................................................................................191  
Flash Compensation.................................................................196  
FV Lock ........................................................................................198  
Other Shooting Options  
The R Button (Viewfinder Photography) ............................201  
The b button ..............................................................................205  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings....................206  
Multiple Exposure.....................................................................209  
Interval Timer Photography....................................................216  
Time-Lapse Photography ........................................................223  
Non-CPU Lenses ........................................................................229  
Location Data.............................................................................233  
More About Playback  
Viewing Images .........................................................................235  
Full-Frame Playback..........................................................................235  
Thumbnail Playback .........................................................................235  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Information.................................................................... 238  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 248  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................... 250  
Deleting Photographs ............................................................. 251  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback.......................................... 251  
The Playback Menu .......................................................................... 252  
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2 .................................................................. 253  
Using ViewNX 2......................................................................... 257  
Copy Pictures to the Computer ................................................... 257  
Ethernet and Wireless Networks.................................................. 261  
Printing Photographs .............................................................. 263  
Connecting the Printer.................................................................... 263  
Printing Pictures One at a Time.................................................... 264  
Printing Multiple Pictures............................................................... 266  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...................................... 267  
Viewing Photographs on TV................................................... 269  
HDMI Options..................................................................................... 270  
Menu Guide  
Defaults ...................................................................................... 272  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images.......................... 280  
Playback Menu Options.................................................................. 280  
Playback Folder .......................................................................... 281  
Hide Image................................................................................... 281  
Playback Display Options ....................................................... 282  
Copy Image(s) ............................................................................. 283  
Image Review.............................................................................. 287  
After Delete.................................................................................. 287  
Rotate Tall..................................................................................... 288  
Slide Show.................................................................................... 288  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...........................290  
Shooting Menu Options..................................................................290  
Shooting Menu Bank ................................................................291  
Extended Menu Banks..............................................................292  
Storage Folder.............................................................................293  
File Naming ..................................................................................295  
JPEG/TIFF Recording.................................................................295  
NEF (RAW) Recording ...............................................................295  
Color Space...................................................................................296  
Vignette Control.........................................................................297  
Auto Distortion Control ...........................................................298  
Long Exposure NR  
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction) ...................................299  
High ISO NR..................................................................................299  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ............300  
Custom Settings.................................................................................301  
Custom Settings Bank ..............................................................304  
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................306  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection.......................................................306  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection .......................................................307  
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On..........................................308  
a4: AF Activation.........................................................................308  
a5: Focus Point Illumination...................................................309  
a6: AF Point Illumination .........................................................310  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around................................................310  
a8: Number of Focus Points....................................................311  
a9: Store by Orientation...........................................................312  
a10: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator.........................................313  
a11: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection......................................314  
a12: Autofocus Mode Restrictions .......................................314  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b: Metering/Exposure ................................................................. 315  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value................................................ 315  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl ............................................ 315  
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value.......................................... 315  
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation........................................ 316  
b5: Matrix Metering................................................................... 317  
b6: Center-Weighted Area...................................................... 317  
b7: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure.......................................... 318  
c: Timers/AE Lock.......................................................................... 319  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L........................................... 319  
c2: Standby Timer...................................................................... 319  
c3: Self-Timer............................................................................... 319  
c4: Monitor off Delay ................................................................ 320  
d: Shooting/Display ..................................................................... 321  
d1: Beep......................................................................................... 321  
d2: CL Mode Shooting Speed................................................ 321  
d3: Max. Continuous Release................................................. 322  
d4: Exposure Delay Mode....................................................... 322  
d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter................................... 323  
d6: File Number Sequence ..................................................... 324  
d7: Viewfinder Grid Display.................................................... 325  
d8: ISO Display and Adjustment........................................... 325  
d9: Screen Tips............................................................................ 325  
d10: Information Display......................................................... 326  
d11: LCD Illumination............................................................... 326  
d12: MB-D12 Battery Type...................................................... 327  
d13: Battery Order ..................................................................... 328  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................329  
e1: Flash Sync Speed.................................................................329  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed ...........................................................331  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash.............................................331  
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash.................................................338  
e5: Modeling Flash.....................................................................338  
e6: Auto Bracketing Set............................................................338  
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)...............................................339  
e8: Bracketing Order .................................................................340  
f: Controls.........................................................................................341  
f1: D Switch..................................................................................341  
f2: Multi Selector Center Button ...........................................341  
f3: Multi Selector.........................................................................343  
f4: Assign Fn Button ..................................................................343  
f5: Assign Preview Button .......................................................349  
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...................................................349  
f7: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock ...........................................350  
f8: Assign BKT Button................................................................350  
f9: Customize Command Dials ..............................................351  
f10: Release Button to Use Dial .............................................353  
f11: Slot Empty Release Lock..................................................354  
f12: Reverse Indicators .............................................................354  
f13: Assign Movie Record Button .........................................355  
f14: Live View Button Options ...............................................356  
f15: Assign MB-D12 AF-ON .....................................................356  
f16: Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button.....................................357  
f17: Lens Focus Function Buttons ........................................359  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g: Movie............................................................................................ 361  
g1: Assign Fn Button................................................................. 361  
g2: Assign Preview Button...................................................... 362  
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button.................................................. 363  
g4: Assign Shutter Button....................................................... 364  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................... 365  
Setup Menu Options........................................................................ 365  
Format Memory Card ............................................................... 366  
Monitor Brightness.................................................................... 367  
Monitor Color Balance ............................................................. 368  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ....................................................... 369  
Flicker Reduction ....................................................................... 371  
Time Zone and Date ................................................................. 372  
Language...................................................................................... 372  
Auto Image Rotation ................................................................ 373  
Battery Info................................................................................... 374  
Image Comment ........................................................................ 375  
Copyright Information............................................................. 376  
Save/Load Settings ................................................................... 377  
Virtual Horizon............................................................................ 379  
AF Fine-Tune ............................................................................... 380  
Eye-Fi Upload .............................................................................. 382  
Firmware Version....................................................................... 383  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ...........384  
Retouch Menu Options ...................................................................384  
D-Lighting.....................................................................................388  
Red-Eye Correction....................................................................389  
Trim .................................................................................................390  
Monochrome...............................................................................392  
Filter Effects..................................................................................393  
Color Balance...............................................................................394  
Image Overlay .............................................................................395  
NEF (RAW) Processing ..............................................................399  
Resize..............................................................................................401  
Quick Retouch.............................................................................404  
Straighten .....................................................................................404  
Distortion Control ......................................................................405  
Fisheye ...........................................................................................406  
Color Outline................................................................................406  
Color Sketch.................................................................................407  
Perspective Control...................................................................408  
Miniature Effect...........................................................................409  
Selective Color.............................................................................410  
Side-by-Side Comparison........................................................412  
O My Menu/m Recent Settings ..............................................414  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
Compatible Lenses................................................................... 419  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ....................................... 428  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)............................... 428  
Other Accessories..................................................................... 436  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter ..................... 442  
Caring for the Camera ............................................................. 444  
Storage.................................................................................................. 444  
Cleaning................................................................................................ 444  
Image Sensor Cleaning ................................................................... 445  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ..................... 452  
Exposure Program.................................................................... 458  
Troubleshooting....................................................................... 459  
Battery/Display................................................................................... 459  
Shooting............................................................................................... 460  
Playback................................................................................................ 464  
Miscellaneous..................................................................................... 465  
Error Messages.......................................................................... 466  
Specifications ............................................................................ 473  
Approved Memory Cards........................................................ 487  
Memory Card Capacity ............................................................ 489  
Battery Life................................................................................. 492  
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash and AF-Assist  
Illuminator............................................................................ 494  
Index ........................................................................................... 498  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,  
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this  
equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the  
product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions  
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all  
warnings before using this Nikon product.  
A
❚❚ WARNINGS  
AKeep the sun out of the frame  
Keep the sun well out of the frame  
when shooting backlit subjects.  
Sunlight focused into the camera  
when the sun is in or close to the  
frame could cause a fire.  
ATurn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an  
unusual smell coming from the  
equipment or AC adapter (available  
separately), unplug the AC adapter  
and remove the battery immediately,  
taking care to avoid burns.  
ADo not look at the sun through the  
viewfinder  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing the battery,  
take the equipment to a Nikon-  
authorized service center for  
inspection.  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
AUsing the viewfinder diopter adjustment  
control  
ADo not use in the presence of flammable  
gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in  
the presence of flammable gas, as  
this could result in explosion or fire.  
When operating the viewfinder  
diopter adjustment control with your  
eye to the viewfinder, care should be  
taken not to put your finger in your  
eye accidentally.  
AKeep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in injury. In addition,  
note that small parts constitute a  
choking hazard. Should a child  
swallow any part of this equipment,  
consult a physician immediately.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ADo not disassemble  
AObserve caution when using the flash  
Using the camera with the flash in  
close contact with the skin or other  
objects could cause burns.  
Using the flash close to the subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. The flash should be no  
less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from  
the subject. Particular care should  
be observed when photographing  
infants.  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified  
technician. Should the product break  
open as the result of a fall or other  
accident, remove the battery and/or  
AC adapter and then take the product  
to a Nikon-authorized service center  
for inspection.  
ADo not place the strap around the neck of AAvoid contact with liquid crystal  
an infant or child  
Should the monitor break, care  
Placing the camera strap around the  
neck of an infant or child could result  
in strangulation.  
should be taken to avoid injury due to  
broken glass and to prevent the liquid  
crystal from the monitor touching the  
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.  
ADo not remain in contact with the  
camera, battery, or charger for extended ADo not carry tripods with a lens or camera  
periods while the devices are on or in use  
Parts of the device become hot.  
Leaving the device in direct contact  
with the skin for extended periods  
may result in low-temperature burns.  
attached  
You could trip or accidentally strike  
others, resulting in injury.  
ADo not leave the product where it will be  
exposed to extremely high  
temperatures, such as in an enclosed  
automobile or in direct sunlight  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could cause damage or fire.  
ADo not aim a flash at the operator of a  
motor vehicle  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in accidents.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AObserve proper precautions when  
handling batteries  
When the battery is not in use,  
attach the terminal cover and store  
in a cool, dry place.  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
Use only batteries approved for use  
in this equipment.  
The battery may be hot  
immediately after use or when the  
product has been used on battery  
power for an extended period.  
Before removing the battery turn  
the camera off and allow the battery  
to cool.  
Do not short or disassemble the  
battery.  
Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are  
using an AC adapter, be sure it is  
unplugged.  
Discontinue use immediately  
should you notice any changes in  
the battery, such as discoloration or  
deformation.  
Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
Do not expose the battery to flame  
or to excessive heat.  
Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
AObserve proper precautions when  
handling the charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in injury or  
product malfunction due to fire or  
electric shock.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage  
to the product, be sure to remove  
the battery when no charge  
remains.  
Do not short the charger terminals.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in overheating and  
damage to the charger.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with a  
dry cloth. Continued use could  
result in fire.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not handle the power cable or AUse appropriate cables  
go near the charger during  
When connecting cables to the input  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in  
electric shock.  
and output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
Do not damage, modify, or forcibly  
tug or bend the power cable. Do  
not place it under heavy objects or  
expose it to heat or flame. Should  
the insulation be damaged and the  
wires become exposed, take the  
power cable to a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for  
inspection. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
Do not handle the plug or charger  
with wet hands. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in injury  
or product malfunction due to fire or  
electric shock.  
ACD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played back  
on audio CD equipment. Playing CD-  
ROMs on an audio CD player could  
cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
AFollow the directions of airline and  
hospital personnel  
This camera transmits radio  
frequencies that could interfere with  
medical equipment or aircraft  
navigation. Disable the wireless  
network feature and remove all  
wireless accessories from the camera  
before boarding an aircraft, and turn  
the camera off during take off and  
landing. In medical facilities, follow  
staff instructions regarding the use of  
wireless devices.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from  
one voltage to another or with DC-  
to-AC inverters. Failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the  
product or cause overheating or fire.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
No part of the manuals included  
with this product may be  
reproduced, transmitted,  
Nikon will not be held liable for any  
damages resulting from the use of  
this product.  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval  
system, or translated into any  
While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
language in any form, by any means, manuals is accurate and complete,  
without Nikon’s prior written  
permission.  
we would appreciate it were you to  
bring any errors or omissions to the  
attention of the Nikon  
representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Nikon reserves the right to change  
the specifications of the hardware  
and software described in these  
manuals at any time and without  
prior notice.  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT  
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that  
electrical and electronic  
equipment is to be  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery  
is to be collected  
collected separately.  
separately.  
The following apply only  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
All batteries, whether marked with  
this symbol or not, are designated  
to users in European countries:  
This product is designated for  
separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do not for separate collection at an  
dispose of as household waste.  
Separate collection and recycling  
helps conserve natural resources  
appropriate collection point. Do not  
dispose of as household waste.  
For more information, contact the  
and prevent negative consequences retailer or the local authorities in  
for human health and the  
charge of waste management.  
environment that might result from  
incorrect disposal.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
Power Cable  
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the  
voltage in use, be at least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or  
better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC rules. These limits are  
D810  
designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
in a residential installation. This  
The FCC requires the user be notified  
equipment generates, uses, and can  
that any changes or modifications  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
made to this device that are not  
not installed and used in accordance  
expressly approved by Nikon  
with the instructions, may cause harmful  
Corporation may void the user’s  
interference to radio communications.  
authority to operate the equipment.  
However, there is no guarantee that  
Interface Cables  
interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try  
to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an  
outlet on a circuit different from that  
to which the receiver is connected.  
Use the interface cables sold or  
provided by Nikon for your  
equipment. Using other interface  
cables may exceed the limits of Class  
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this  
product may expose you to lead, a  
chemical known to the State of  
California to cause birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally  
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device  
may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied Cautions on certain copies and  
or reproduced  
reproductions  
Do not copy or reproduce paper  
The government has issued cautions  
money, coins, securities, government on copies or reproductions of  
bonds, or local government bonds,  
even if such copies or reproductions  
are stamped “Sample.”  
securities issued by private  
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift  
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,  
or coupon tickets, except when a  
minimum of necessary copies are to  
be provided for business use by a  
company. Also, do not copy or  
reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by  
public agencies and private groups,  
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes  
and meal coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of  
paper money, coins, or securities  
which are circulated in a foreign  
country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused  
postage stamps or post cards issued  
by the government is prohibited.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
stamps issued by the government  
and of certified documents  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as  
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,  
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and  
photographs is governed by  
stipulated by law is prohibited.  
national and international copyright  
laws. Do not use this product for the  
purpose of making illegal copies or  
to infringe copyright laws.  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data  
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted  
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using  
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of  
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another  
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the  
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private  
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any  
pictures selected for preset manual (0 167). Before discarding the camera or  
transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the  
Network > Network settings option in the camera setup menu to delete any  
personal network information. For more information, see the documentation  
provided with the optional communication unit. Care should be taken to  
avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.  
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL  
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH  
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED  
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS  
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS  
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE  
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex  
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including  
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon  
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven  
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic  
circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage  
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of  
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the  
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with  
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,  
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local  
authorized Nikon dealer.  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use  
with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate  
within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON  
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON  
WARRANTY.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or  
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the  
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for  
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing  
product support and education, continually-updated information is  
available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,  
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice  
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be  
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following  
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls  
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section  
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
1 Release mode dial ......................102 8 Sub-command dial .................... 351  
2 Release mode dial  
lock release .................................102  
3 T button ..................79, 83, 206  
4 U button .................149, 153, 157  
5 S button...........................109, 111  
6 Y button......................................115  
7 Accessory shoe  
(for optional flash unit)  
.....................................435, 436, 479  
9 Power switch ................................. 16  
10 Shutter-release button................ 30  
11 E button.............................. 130, 206  
12 Movie-record button ................... 52  
13 I/Q button................. 116, 366  
14 Control panel....................................5  
15 Main command dial................... 351  
16 Focal plane mark (E) ............... 101  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Camera Body (Continued)  
1 Built-in flash................................. 189 10 Focus-mode selector.... 39, 87, 100  
2 Flash pop-up button.................. 189 11 Lens mounting mark ....................15  
3 D button........ 134, 139, 143, 350 12 Mirror.................................... 108, 448  
4 M/Y button....................... 190, 196 13 Metering coupling lever ........... 477  
5 Audio connector cover..........56, 63 14 Headphone connector.................56  
6 USB connector cover ........ 257,263 15 Connector for external  
microphone...................................63  
16 USB connector ................... 257, 263  
17 HDMI connector ......................... 269  
7 HDMI connector cover .............. 269  
8 Lens release button.......................23  
9 AF-mode button ........39, 41, 88, 91  
D The Speaker  
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.  
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on  
the magnetic devices.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign  
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1 Stereo microphone.................49, 62 10 Tripod socket  
2 AF-assist illuminator...................313 11 Lens mount ........................... 15, 101  
Self-timer lamp............................107  
Red-eye reduction lamp ...........191  
12 CPU contacts  
13 Ten-pin remote terminal  
3 Pv button ............. 54, 117, 349, 362  
4 Fn button....................... 78, 343, 361  
5 Memory card slot cover.........14, 21  
6 Power connector cover .............442  
7 Battery-chamber cover latch ..... 14  
cover.................................... 233, 439  
14 Flash sync terminal cover ......... 429  
15 Flash sync terminal .................... 429  
16 Ten-pin remote  
terminal .............................. 233, 439  
8 Battery-chamber cover ............... 14 17 Body cap ................................ 15, 436  
9 Contact cover for optional  
MB-D12 battery pack................436  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Camera Body (Continued)  
1 Eyepiece shutter lever .........23, 106 13 Memory card access lamp.... 21, 30  
2 Viewfinder .......................................17 14 R (info) button ...................... 8, 201  
3 Viewfinder eyepiece ............23, 106 15 b button .............9, 42, 55, 205, 386  
4 Diopter adjustment control........17 16 Monitor  
17 J (OK) button................................25  
18 W button ............. 38, 44, 235, 248  
19 X button................. 38, 44, 235, 248  
20 L/Z/Q button........25, 171, 250  
21 G button ...........................24, 272  
22 K button ...............................31, 235  
23 O/Q button ................33, 251, 366  
5 A button.......36, 97, 128, 349, 363  
6 B button.............................50, 88  
7 Eyelet for camera strap ................12  
8 Multi selector...........................11, 25  
9 Focus selector lock ........................94  
10 Speaker ............................................66  
11 a button .................................35, 49  
12 Live view selector ...................35, 49  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Control Panel  
The control panel shows a variety of camera settings when the  
camera is on. The items shown here appear the first time the  
camera is turned on; information on other settings can be found  
in the relevant sections of this manual.  
1 2  
3
4
5
14  
13  
6
7
8
9
12  
10  
11  
1 Exposure mode ...........................116 9 Number of exposures  
remaining............................. 20, 489  
2 Metering .......................................114  
3 Shutter speed .....................119, 121  
4 B indicator ...............................372  
5 Aperture (f-number) .........120, 121  
6 CompactFlash memory card  
10 Focus mode.................................... 87  
11 White balance.............................. 148  
12 Image quality ................................ 79  
13 AF-area mode ..........................90, 91  
indicator......................................... 14 14 Image size (JPEG and TIFF  
images) .......................................... 83  
7 SD memory card indicator.......... 14  
8 Battery indicator ........................... 19  
A The B Indicator  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power  
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is  
installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector  
and AC adapter (0 436). Two days of charging will power the clock for  
about three months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the  
clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with any new  
photographs will not be correct. Set the clock to the correct time and  
date using the Time zone and date > Date and time option in the  
setup menu (0 18).  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Viewfinder Display  
1 Framing grid (displayed when On 6 Metering....................................... 114  
is selected for Custom Setting d7)  
....................................................... 325  
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock............. 128  
8 Shutter speed lock icon ............ 126  
9 Shutter speed..................... 119, 121  
Autofocus mode............................87  
2 Focus points.... 17, 30, 94, 310, 311  
AF-area mode ..........................90, 91  
3 AF area brackets....................17, 239  
4 Virtual horizon display .............. 347  
5 Focus indicator......................30, 101  
10 Aperture lock icon...................... 127  
11 Aperture (f-number)......... 120, 121  
Aperture (number of stops)  
.............................................. 120, 424  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12 Exposure mode ...........................116 17 Flash-ready indicator................. 189  
13 Flash compensation indicator  
18 FV lock indicator ......................... 199  
19 Flash sync indicator.................... 329  
20 Aperture stop indicator.... 120, 424  
21 Exposure indicator ..................... 122  
Exposure compensation  
.......................................................196  
14 Exposure compensation  
indicator.......................................131  
15 ISO sensitivity ..............................109  
Preset manual white balance  
display.......................................... 131  
recording indicator ...................160  
ADL bracketing amount ...........348  
AF-area mode ...................90, 91, 92  
22 Low battery warning ................... 19  
23 Exposure/flash bracketing  
indicator ...................................... 134  
WB bracketing indicator .......... 139  
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 143  
16 Number of exposures  
remaining............................. 19, 489  
Number of shots remaining before  
memory buffer fills...........105, 489  
Exposure compensation  
value .............................................131  
Flash compensation value........196  
24 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator ...................................... 112  
25 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)..................................... 20  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
D No Battery  
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the  
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate  
a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a  
fully-charged battery is inserted.  
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays  
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with  
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low  
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The R Button  
Press the R button to view shooting  
information during viewfinder  
photography (0 201).  
R button  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The b button  
Use the b button for quick access to  
frequently-used settings in playback  
mode (0 386) and during viewfinder  
(0 205) and live view photography  
(0 42) and movie live view (0 55).  
b button  
Viewfinder photography  
Playback  
Live view photography  
Movie live view  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The BM-12 Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover is provided with the  
camera to keep the monitor clean and  
protect it when the camera is not in use.  
To attach the cover, insert the projection  
on the top of the cover into the  
matching indentation above the camera  
monitor (q) and press the bottom of  
the cover until it clicks into place (w).  
To remove the cover, hold the camera  
firmly and pull the bottom of the cover  
gently outwards as shown at right.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Multi Selector  
In this manual, operations using the multi selector are  
represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons.  
1: Press the multi selector up  
The center of the multi  
selector  
4: Press the multi  
2: Press the multi  
selector left  
selector right  
3: Press the multi selector down  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Steps  
Follow the seven steps below to ready the camera for use.  
1
Attach the strap.  
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.  
D The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii–xvi and 452–457  
of this manual.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Charge the battery.  
Insert the battery and plug the charger in (depending on the  
country or region, the charger comes with either an AC wall  
adapter or a power cable). An exhausted battery will fully  
charge in about two hours and 35 minutes.  
AC wall adapter: Insert the AC wall adapter into the charger AC  
inlet (q). Slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and  
rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e). Insert the  
battery and plug the charger in.  
AC wall adapter latch  
90 °  
Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug  
in the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the  
cable in.  
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges.  
Battery charging  
Charging complete  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Insert the battery and a memory card.  
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,  
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the  
battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep  
the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks  
the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.  
Battery latch  
Memory cards are inserted as shown below.  
SD memory cards: Slide the card in until it clicks into place.  
CompactFlash memory cards: Slide the card in, stopping when  
the eject button pops up.  
Eject button  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Attach a lens.  
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when  
the lens or body cap is removed. The lens generally used in  
this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 24–  
120mm f/4G ED VR.  
Remove the  
camera body cap  
Remove the rear lens cap  
Mounting mark (camera)  
Align the mounting  
marks  
Mounting mark (lens)  
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place  
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Turn the camera on.  
Turn the camera on. The  
control panel will light.  
Power switch  
Control panel  
A LCD Illuminators  
Rotating the power switch toward  
D
activates the  
standby timer and control panel backlight (LCD illuminator),  
allowing the display to be read in the dark. After the power  
switch is released, the illuminators will remain lit for six  
seconds while the standby timer is active or until the  
shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward  
D
again.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Focus the viewfinder.  
Lift the diopter adjustment control  
and rotate it until the viewfinder  
display, focus points, and AF area  
brackets are in sharp focus. When  
operating the control with your eye  
to the viewfinder, be careful not to  
put your fingers or fingernails in your eye. Push the diopter  
adjustment control back in once you have adjusted focus to  
your satisfaction.  
Focus point  
AF area brackets  
Viewfinder not in focus  
Viewfinder in focus  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
Choose a language and set the  
camera clock.  
Use the Language and Time zone  
and date options in the setup menu  
to choose a language and set the  
camera clock (Language is  
G button  
automatically shown highlighted the  
first time the menus are displayed).  
Time zone and date is used to  
choose a time zone (Time zone),  
choose a date format (Date format),  
turn daylight saving time on and off  
(Daylight saving time), and set the  
camera clock to the current date and  
time (Date and time; note that the  
camera uses a 24-hour clock). For  
information on using the menus, see  
The camera is now ready for use. Proceed to page 29 for  
information on taking photographs.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Battery Level  
The battery level is shown in the control  
panel and viewfinder.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Control panel Viewfinder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
L
K
J
I
Battery partially discharged.  
Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare  
battery.  
H
d
H
(flashes)  
d
(flashes)  
Shutter release disabled. Charge or  
exchange battery.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Number of Exposures Remaining  
The memory cards currently inserted in  
the camera are indicated as shown (the  
example at right shows the icons  
displayed when both an SD and a  
CompactFlash card are inserted). If the  
memory card is full or an error has  
Control panel  
occurred, the icon for the affected card will flash (0 468).  
The control panel and viewfinder show  
the number of photographs that can be  
taken at current settings (values over  
1000 are rounded down to the nearest  
hundred; e.g., values between 1200 and  
1299 are shown as 1.2 k).  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
A Camera Off Display  
If the camera is turned off with a battery  
and memory card inserted, the memory  
card icon and number of exposures  
remaining will be displayed (some memory  
cards may in rare cases only display this  
information when the camera is on).  
Control panel  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards  
Removing the Battery  
Turn the camera off and open the  
battery-chamber cover. Press the  
battery latch in the direction shown by  
the arrow to release the battery and  
then remove the battery by hand.  
Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn  
the camera off and open the memory card slot cover.  
SD memory cards: Press the card in and  
then release it (q). The memory card  
GB  
can then be removed by hand (w).  
16  
CompactFlash memory cards: Press the  
eject button (q) to partially eject the  
GB  
card (w). The memory card can then  
16  
be removed by hand. Do not push on  
the memory card while pressing the  
eject button. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the camera  
or memory card.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Memory Cards  
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do  
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or  
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while  
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to  
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to  
the camera or card.  
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the card.  
Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Do not format memory cards in a computer.  
A The Write Protect Switch  
SD memory cards are equipped  
with a write protect switch to  
prevent accidental loss of data.  
When this switch is in the “lock”  
position, the memory card can not  
Write-protect switch  
be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded (a warning  
will be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the shutter).  
To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.  
A No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted, the control  
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the  
camera is turned off with a charged  
battery and no memory card inserted, S  
will be displayed in the control panel.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing  
or exchanging lenses. To remove the  
lens, press and hold the lens release  
button (q) while turning the lens  
clockwise (w). After removing the lens,  
replace the lens caps and camera body  
cap.  
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 422), lock  
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).  
A Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses  
Corrective lenses (available separately;  
viewfinder diopter. Before attaching a  
diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens,  
remove the viewfinder eyepiece by closing  
the viewfinder shutter to release the  
eyepiece lock (q) and then unscrewing the  
eyepiece as shown at right (w).  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup  
options can be accessed from the  
camera menus. To view the menus,  
press the G button.  
G button  
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0 280)  
C: Shooting (0 290)  
A: Custom Settings (0 300)  
B: Setup (0 365)  
N: Retouch (0 384)  
O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS  
(defaults to MY MENU; 0 414)  
Slider shows position in current  
menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
Help icon (0 25)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Camera Menus  
❚❚ Menu Controls  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.  
Multi selector  
Move cursor up  
Select highlighted item  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
Select highlighted  
item or display sub-  
menu  
J button  
Select highlighted  
item  
Move cursor down  
A The d (Help) Icon  
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, help  
can be displayed by pressing the L (Z/Q) button.  
A description of the currently selected option or menu will be  
displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through  
the display.  
L (Z/Q) button  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
❚❚ Navigating the Menus  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1
Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus.  
G button  
2
3
Highlight the icon for the  
current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the  
icon for the current menu.  
Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
5
6
7
Position the cursor in the  
selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the  
cursor in the selected  
menu.  
Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1or 3to highlight a  
menu item.  
Display options.  
Press 2 to display options  
for the selected menu  
item.  
Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
an option.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted  
item. To exit without making a  
selection, press the G button.  
J button  
Note the following points:  
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently  
available.  
While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally  
has the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in  
which selection can only be made by pressing J.  
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Photography and Playback  
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography  
1
Ready the Camera.  
When framing photographs in the  
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your  
right hand and cradle the camera  
body or lens with your left.  
When framing photographs in  
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the  
camera as shown at right.  
2
Frame the photograph.  
At default settings, the camera will  
focus on the subject in the center  
focus point. Frame a photograph in  
the viewfinder with the main subject  
in the center focus point.  
Focus point  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus (if  
the subject is poorly lit,  
the AF-assist illuminator  
may light). The in-focus  
indicator (I) will appear in  
Focus indicator  
the viewfinder when the focus operation is complete.  
Viewfinder display  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
F
Focus point is between camera and subject.  
Focus point is behind subject.  
H
F H  
(flashes)  
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus point  
using autofocus. See page 99.  
4
Shoot.  
Smoothly press the  
shutter-release-buttonthe  
rest of the way down to  
take the photograph. The  
memory card access lamp  
will light and the  
Memory card access  
lamp  
photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor  
for a few seconds. Do not eject the memory card or remove or  
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and  
recording is complete.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Playback  
1
Press the K button.  
A photograph will be displayed in the  
monitor. The memory card  
containing the picture currently  
displayed is shown by an icon.  
K button  
2
View additional pictures.  
Additional pictures can be  
displayed by pressing 4  
or 2. To view additional  
information on the current  
photograph, press 1 and  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 287),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for a few  
seconds after shooting.  
A See Also  
See page 237 for information on choosing a memory card slot.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor,  
press the O (Q) button. Note that photographs can not be  
recovered once deleted.  
1
Display the photograph.  
Display the photograph you wish to  
delete as described on the preceding  
page. The location of the current  
image is shown by an icon at the  
bottom left corner of the display.  
2
Delete the photograph.  
Press the O (Q) button. A  
confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
press the O (Q) button again to  
delete the image and return to  
playback. To exit without deleting  
the picture, press K.  
O (Q) button  
A Delete  
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which  
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu  
(0 252).  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)  
The viewfinder indicator display and control panel  
shutter speed and aperture display will turn off if no  
operations are performed for about six seconds, reducing  
the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button  
halfway to reactivate the display. The length of time  
before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using  
Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319).  
Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Live View Photography  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1
2
3
Rotate the live view selector to C  
(live view photography).  
Live view selector  
Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised and the view  
through the lens will be displayed in  
the camera monitor. The subject will  
no longer be visible in the viewfinder.  
a button  
Position the focus point.  
Position the focus point over your subject as described on  
page 40.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4
Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus.  
The focus point will flash green while  
the camera focuses. If the camera is  
able to focus, the focus point will be  
displayed in green; if the camera is  
unable to focus, the focus point will  
flash red (note that pictures can be  
taken even when the focus point  
flashes red; check focus in the  
A AE-L/AF-L button  
monitor before shooting). Exposure can be locked by  
pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button (0 128); focus locks while the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
A Exposure Preview  
During live view photography, you can  
press J to preview the effects of shutter  
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity on  
exposure. Exposure can be adjusted by  
5 EV (0 130), although only values  
between –3 and +3 EV are reflected in  
the preview display. Note that the  
preview may not accurately reflect the  
final results when flash lighting is used, Active D-Lighting (0 182),  
High Dynamic Range (HDR; 0 184), or bracketing is in effect, A  
(auto) is selected for the Picture Control Contrast parameter  
(0 174), or a value other than 0 is selected for Clarity (0 174), or  
p is selected for shutter speed. If the subject is very bright or  
very dark, the exposure indicators will flash to warn that the  
preview may not accurately reflect exposure. Exposure preview is  
not available when A or & is selected for shutter speed.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D Using Autofocus in Live View Photography and Movie Live View  
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with  
other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is  
slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera  
focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green  
when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to  
focus in the following situations:  
The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
The subject lacks contrast  
The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply  
contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or  
other light source that changes in brightness  
Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,  
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting  
A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g.,  
blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)  
The subject is moving  
A The Standby Timer  
Regardless of the setting selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby  
timer, 0 319), the standby timer will not expire during live view  
photography.  
5
Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down to shoot. The  
monitor will turn off.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Exit live view mode.  
Press the a button to exit live view  
mode.  
A Live View Zoom Preview  
Press the X button to magnify the view in the monitor up to a  
maximum of about 23×. A navigation window will appear in a gray  
frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector  
to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor, or press W to  
zoom out.  
X button  
Navigation window  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Focus  
To focus using autofocus, rotate the  
focus-mode selector to AF and follow the  
steps below to choose autofocus and  
AF-area modes. For information on  
focusing manually, see page 41.  
Focus-mode selector  
❚❚ Choosing a Focus Mode  
The following autofocus modes are available during live view  
photography and movie live view:  
Mode  
AF-S  
Description  
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway.  
Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses  
AF-F continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks  
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and  
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is  
displayed in the monitor.  
AF-mode button  
Main command  
dial  
Monitor  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
❚❚ Choosing an AF-Area Mode  
The following AF-area modes can be selected during live view  
photography and movie live view:  
Mode  
Description  
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically  
detects and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is  
indicated by a double yellow border (if multiple faces, up to a  
maximum of 35, are detected, the camera will focus on the  
closest subject; to choose a different subject, use the multi  
selector). If the camera can no longer detect the subject  
(because, for example, the subject has turned to face away from  
the camera), the border will no longer be displayed.  
!
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other  
non-portrait subjects. Use the multi selector to move the focus  
point anywhere in the frame, or press the center of the multi  
selector to position the focus point in the center of the frame.  
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the  
frame. Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere  
in the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to position  
the focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is  
recommended.  
5
6
Subject-tracking AF: Use the multi selector to position the focus  
point over your subject and press the center of the multi selector  
to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject  
as it moves through the frame. To end tracking, press the center  
of the multi selector again. Note that the camera may be unable  
to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are  
obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or  
brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or  
similar in color or brightness to the background.  
&
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and  
rotate the sub-command dial until the desired mode is displayed  
in the monitor.  
AF-mode button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Monitor  
Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 100),  
rotate the lens focus ring until the  
subject is in focus. To magnify the view  
in the monitor for precise focus, press  
the X button (0 38).  
X button  
A Previewing Focus During Live View Photography  
To temporarily select maximum aperture for an improved focus  
preview during live view photography, press the Pv button. To return  
aperture to its original value, press the button again or focus using  
autofocus. If the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down to  
take a picture during focus preview, aperture will return to the original  
value before the photo is taken.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the b Button  
The options listed below can be  
accessed by pressing the b button  
during live view photography. Highlight  
items using the multi selector and press  
2 to view options for the highlighted  
item. After choosing the desired setting,  
press J to return to the b-button menu.  
Press the b button again to exit to the  
shooting display.  
b button  
Option  
Description  
Choose an image area for live view photography  
(0 74).  
Image area  
Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 182).  
Electronic front- Enable or disable the electronic front-curtain shutter  
curtain shutter for mirror-up photography (0 323).  
Press 1 or 3 to adjust  
monitor brightness for live  
view photography (note  
that this affects live view  
only and has no effect on  
photographs or movies or  
Monitor  
on the brightness of the  
brightness  
monitor for menus or  
playback; to adjust the brightness of the monitor for  
menus and playback without affecting live view  
photography or movie live view, use the Monitor  
brightness option in the setup menu as described on  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Option  
Description  
During live view  
photography, the white  
balance (hue) of the  
monitor can be set to a  
value different from that  
used for photographs  
(0 148). This can be  
effective if the lighting  
Photo live view  
display WB  
under which shots are framed is different from that  
used when the photographs are taken, as is  
sometimes the case when a flash or preset manual  
white balance is used. Adjusting the photo live view  
display white balance to produce a similar effect to  
that used for the actual photographs makes it easier  
to picture the results. To use the same white balance  
for both the view in the monitor and the photograph,  
select None.  
View two separate areas of  
the frame side-by-side  
(0 44). This option can be  
used, for example, to align  
buildings with the horizon.  
Split-screen  
display zoom  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Split-Screen Display Zoom  
Selecting Split-screen display zoom in  
the live view photography b button  
menu splits the display into two boxes  
showing separate areas of the frame  
side-by-side at a high zoom ratio. The  
positions of the magnified areas are  
shown in the navigation window.  
Navigation window  
Use the X and W buttons to zoom in  
and out, or use the L (Z/Q) button to  
select a box and press 4 or 2 to scroll  
the selected area left or right. Pressing  
1 or 3 scrolls both areas up or down  
simultaneously. To focus on the subject  
at the center of the selected area, press  
the shutter-release button halfway. To  
Area in focus  
exit the split-screen display, press the b button.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Live View Display: Live View Photography  
Item  
Description  
0
The amount of time remaining before live  
view ends automatically. Displayed if  
shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
q Time remaining  
Photo live view  
display white  
balance indicator  
Autofocus mode  
AF-area mode  
Monitor hue (photo live view display white  
balance).  
w
The current autofocus mode.  
The current AF-area mode.  
e
r
The current focus point. The display varies  
with the option selected for AF-area mode.  
Focus point  
t
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Information Display: Live View Photography  
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view  
photography, press the R button.  
Information on  
Information off  
Framing guides  
Virtual horizon  
Histogram (exposure  
preview only; 0 36)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with  
photographs or exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter.  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color  
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while  
bright bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other  
intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a  
strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion  
may occur if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at  
high speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the  
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be  
reduced using Flicker reduction (0 371), although they may still be  
visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting  
in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong  
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in  
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Movie recording is not available during live view photography and  
pressing the movie-record button has no effect. Select movie live view  
(0 49) to shoot movies.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D The Count Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends  
automatically (the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect  
the internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for  
Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 320—5 s  
before the monitor is due to turn off automatically). Depending on  
shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live  
view is selected.  
A HDMI  
If the camera is attached to an HDMI video device during live view  
photography, the camera monitor will remain on and the video device  
will display the view through the lens.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi  
selector, and by the movie-record button and command dials, see  
Custom Settings f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 341) and f13  
(Assign movie record button, 0 355). For information on preventing  
unintended operation of the a button, see Custom Setting f14 (Live  
view button options, 0 356).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Movie Live View  
Movies can be recorded in live view.  
1
Rotate the live view selector to 1  
(movie live view).  
Live view selector  
2
Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised and the view  
through the lens will be displayed in  
the camera monitor as it would  
appear in the actual movie, modified  
for the effects of exposure. The  
subject will no longer be visible in the  
viewfinder.  
a button  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 57) indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
A Audio  
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the  
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording.  
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the  
camera or lens during autofocus, vibration reduction, or changes to  
aperture.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3
4
5
Choose a focus mode (0 39).  
Choose an AF-area mode (0 40).  
Focus.  
B button  
Frame the opening shot and press  
the B button to focus. Note that  
the number of subjects that can be  
detected in face-priority AF drops  
during movie recording.  
A Focusing in Movie Live View  
Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button  
halfway before beginning recording.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Exposure Mode  
The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view:  
ISO  
Shutter  
speed  
Exposure  
compensation  
Aperture  
sensitivity  
Metering  
e, f  
g
h
In exposure mode h, shutter speed can be set to values between  
1
/
25 s and 1  
8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the  
/
frame rate; 0 62). In other exposure modes, shutter speed is  
adjusted automatically. If the subject is over- or under-exposed in  
mode e or f, end live view and start movie live view again or select  
exposure g and adjust aperture. Spot metering is not available  
during movie live view.  
A White Balance  
White balance can be set at any time by pressing the U button  
and rotating the main command dial (0 149).  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to  
start recording. A recording  
indicator and the time available are  
displayed in the monitor. Exposure  
can be locked by pressing the A AE-L/  
AF-L button (0 128) or altered by up  
to 3 EV using exposure  
compensation (0 130). In autofocus  
mode, the camera can be refocused  
by pressing the B button.  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
7
End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again  
to end recording. Recording will end  
automatically when the maximum  
length is reached, or the memory  
card is full.  
A Maximum Length  
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for  
maximum recording times, see page 62); note that depending on  
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is  
reached (0 487).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8
Exit movie live view.  
Press the a button to exit movie live  
view.  
D The Count-Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends  
automatically (0 462). Depending on shooting conditions, the  
timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins.  
Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live  
view will still end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for  
the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie recording.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indices  
If Index marking is selected as the  
“press” option for Custom Setting g1  
(Assign Fn button; 0 361), g2 (Assign  
preview button; 0 362), or g3 (Assign  
AE-L/AF-L button; 0 363), you can  
press the selected button during  
recording to add indices that can be  
used to locate frames during editing and  
playback (0 66). Up to 20 indices can be  
added to each movie.  
Pv button  
Index  
A See Also  
Frame size, frame rate, microphone sensitivity, card slot, and ISO  
sensitivity options are available in the Movie settings menu (0 62).  
Focus can be adjusted manually as described on page 41. The roles  
played by the center of the multi selector, the Fn, Pv, and A AE-L/AF-L  
buttons can be chosen using Custom Settings f2 (Multi selector  
center button; 0 341), g1 (Assign Fn button; 0 361), g2 (Assign  
preview button; 0 362), and g3 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 363;  
this option also allows exposure to be locked without keeping the  
A AE-L/AF-L button pressed), respectively. Custom Setting g4 (Assign  
shutter button; 0 364) controls whether the shutter-release button  
can be used to start movie live view or to start and end movie  
recording. For information on preventing unintended operation of the  
a button, see Custom Setting f14 (Live view button options; 0 356).  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the b Button  
The options listed below can be  
accessed by pressing the b button in  
movie live view. Highlight items using  
the multi selector and press 2 to view  
options for the highlighted item. After  
choosing the desired setting, press J to  
return to the b-button menu. Press the  
b button again to exit to the shooting  
display.  
b button  
Option  
Description  
Image area  
Frame size/  
frame rate  
Choose image area for movie live view (0 59).  
Select a frame size and rate (0 62).  
Movie quality Choose movie quality (0 62).  
Press 1 or 3 to adjust  
microphone sensitivity  
(0 62). Both the built-in  
and optional stereo  
microphones are affected.  
Microphone  
sensitivity  
Frequency  
response  
Wind noise  
reduction  
Control the frequency response of the built-in  
microphone or optional stereo microphones (0 63).  
Enable or disable wind noise reduction using the  
built-in microphone’s low-cut filter (0 63).  
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose  
the card to which movies are recorded (0 63).  
Destination  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Option  
Description  
Press 1 or 3 to adjust  
monitor brightness for  
movie live view (note that  
this affects live view only  
and has no effect on  
photographs or movies or  
on the brightness of the  
monitor for menus or  
playback; 0 42).  
Monitor  
brightness  
Choose whether the  
brightest areas of the  
frame (highlights) are  
shown by slanting lines in  
the display during movie  
live view.  
Highlights  
Highlight display  
Press 1 or 3 to adjust  
headphone volume.  
Headphone  
volume  
A Headphones  
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may  
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when  
headphones are used.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The Live View Display: Movie Live View  
Item  
Description  
0
“No movie” icon  
Indicates that movies can not be recorded. 49  
Volume of audio output to headphones.  
q
w
Headphone volume Displayed when third-party headphones  
are connected.  
Microphone  
Microphone sensitivity.  
sensitivity  
e
r
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed  
in red if level is too high; adjust  
Sound level  
microphone sensitivity accordingly.  
Frequency response The current frequency response.  
t
y
Displayed when wind noise reduction is  
Wind noise reduction  
on.  
Time remaining  
The recording time available for movies.  
(movie live view)  
u
i
o
Movie frame size  
Highlight display  
indicator  
The frame size for movie recording.  
Displayed when highlight display is on.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Information Display: Movie Live View  
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live  
view, press the R button.  
Information on  
Information off  
Framing guides  
Virtual horizon  
Histogram  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Image Area  
Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting  
menu (0 74), all movies and photographs recorded in movie live  
view (0 49) have an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.  
FX-format crop (0 75)  
DX-format crop (0 75)  
DX-based movie  
format crop  
FX-based movie  
format crop  
Images recorded with On selected for Image area > Auto DX  
crop (0 75) and a DX lens attached use a DX-based movie  
format, as do images recorded with DX (24×16) selected for  
Image area > Choose image area. Other images use an FX-  
based movie format. A a icon is displayed when the DX-based  
movie format is selected. The approximate size of the area at the  
center of the image sensor used to record photographs taken in  
movie live view is 32.8 × 18.4 mm when the FX-based movie  
format is selected and 23.4 × 13.2 mm when the DX-based  
movie format is selected.  
A HDMI  
If the camera is connected to an HDMI device (0 48), the view through  
the lens will appear both in the camera monitor and on the HDMI  
device.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Photos During Movie Live View  
If Take photos is selected for Custom Setting g4  
(Assign shutter button, 0 364), photographs can be  
taken at any time during movie live view by pressing  
the shutter-release button all the way down. If movie  
recording is in progress, recording will end and the footage  
recorded to that point will be saved. The photograph will be  
recorded at the current image area setting using a crop with an  
aspect ratio of 16 : 9. Image quality is determined by the option  
selected for Image quality in the shooting menu (0 79). Note  
that the exposure for photographs can not be previewed during  
movie live view; mode e, f, or g is recommended but accurate  
results can be achieved in mode h by adjusting exposure during  
live view photography (0 35) and then ending live view  
photography, starting movie live view, and checking the image  
area.  
A Image Size  
The following table shows the size of photographs taken in movie live  
view:  
Image area  
Option  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Size (pixels)  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
6720 × 3776 56.9 × 32.0/22.4 × 12.6  
5040 × 2832 42.7 × 24.0/16.8 × 9.4  
3360 × 1888 28.4 × 16.0/11.2 × 6.3  
4800 × 2704 40.6 × 22.9/16.0 × 9.0  
3600 × 2024 30.5 × 17.1/12.0 × 6.7  
2400 × 1352 20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5  
FX-based  
format  
DX-based  
format  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels  
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords  
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter  
button, 0 364), the shutter-release buttons on optional wireless  
remote controllers and remote cords (0 439) can be used to start  
movie live view and to start and end movie recording.  
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the  
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the  
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed  
through frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see  
Flicker reduction, 0 371). Flicker may also appear while power  
aperture is in use (0 361). Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and  
bright spots may also appear. Bright bands may appear in some areas  
of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or  
if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright,  
momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the  
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and  
unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the  
lens (0 38) during movie live view.  
Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Movie Settings  
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu (0 290) to  
adjust the following settings.  
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following  
options:  
Maximum bit rate (Mbps)  
(high quality/Normal) (high quality/Normal)  
Maximum length  
Option *  
y/y 1920 × 1080; 60p  
z/z 1920 × 1080; 50p  
1/1 1920 × 1080; 30p  
2/2 1920 × 1080; 25p  
3/3 1920 × 1080; 24p  
4/4 1280 × 720; 60p  
5/5 1280 × 720; 50p  
42/24  
24/12  
10 min./20 min.  
20 min./29 min. 59 s  
* Actual frame rate is 29.97 fps for values listed as 30p, 23.976 fps for values listed as 24p, and  
59.94 fps for values listed as 60p.  
Microphone sensitivity: Turn the built-in or  
optional stereo microphones (0 441)  
on or off or adjust microphone  
sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to  
adjust sensitivity automatically,  
Microphone off to turn sound  
recording off; to select microphone  
sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity, then highlight  
an option and press J.  
D Frame Size and Rate  
Frame size and rate affects the distribution and amount of noise  
(randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots).  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Frequency response: If S Wide range is selected, the built-in  
and optional stereo microphones (0 441) will respond to a  
wide range of frequencies, from music to the bustling hum of a  
city street. Choose T Vocal range to bring out human  
voices.  
Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the  
built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are  
unaffected), reducing noise produced by wind blowing over  
the microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected).  
Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones can be  
enabled or disabled using microphone controls.  
Destination: Choose the slot to which  
movies are recorded. The menu shows  
the time available on each card;  
recording ends automatically when no  
time remains. Note that regardless of  
the option selected, photographs are  
recorded to the card in the primary slot  
A Using an External Microphone  
The optional stereo microphone can be used to record sound in stereo  
or to avoid recording focus noise and other sounds made by the lens  
(0 441).  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Movie ISO sensitivity settings: Adjust the  
following ISO sensitivity settings.  
- ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO  
sensitivity for exposure mode h from  
values between ISO 64 and Hi 2. Auto  
ISO sensitivity control is used in other  
exposure modes.  
- Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On for auto ISO sensitivity  
control in exposure mode h, Off to use the value selected for  
ISO sensitivity (mode M).  
- Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO  
sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.  
Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in exposure modes e, f,  
and g and when On is selected for Auto ISO control (mode  
M) in exposure mode h.  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and  
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This  
can be prevented by choosing a lower value for Movie ISO sensitivity  
settings > Maximum sensitivity.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 235).  
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback; your  
current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Movie  
Volume Guide  
progress bar  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or  
during rewind/advance.  
Play  
Speed increases  
with each press,  
from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to  
skip to beginning or end of movie (first  
frame is indicated by h in top right corner of  
monitor, last frame by i). If playback is  
paused, movie rewinds or advances one  
frame at a time; keep pressed for continuous  
rewind or advance.  
Rewind/  
advance  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To  
Use  
Description  
Rotate the main command dial one stop to  
skip ahead or back 10 s.  
Skip 10 s  
Skip  
ahead/  
back  
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to next  
or previous index, or to skip to the last or  
first frame if the movie contains no indices.  
Adjust  
volume  
/W  
X
Press to increase volume, W to decrease.  
X
Trim movie  
See page 67 for more information.  
b
Exit  
/K Exit to full-frame playback.  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
exit to shooting mode.  
A The p Icon  
Movies with indices (0 54) are indicated  
by a p icon in full-frame playback.  
A The 2 Icon  
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie  
playback if the movie was recorded without  
sound.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected  
frames as JPEG stills.  
Option  
Description  
Create a copy from which the opening or  
closing footage has been removed.  
Choose start/end point  
Save selected frame  
9
4
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.  
Trimming Movies  
To create trimmed copies of movies:  
1
2
Display a movie full frame (0 235).  
Pause the movie on the new  
opening or closing frame.  
Play the movie back as described on  
page 65, pressing the center of the  
multi selector to start and resume  
playback and 3 to pause and  
pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the main Movie progress bar  
or sub-command dial to locate the  
desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can  
be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback  
when you reach the new opening or closing frame.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Select Choose start/end point.  
Press the b button, then highlight  
Choose start/end point and press  
2.  
b button  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Choose the current frame as the  
new start or end point.  
To create a copy that begins from the  
current frame, highlight Start point  
and press J. The frames before the  
current frame will be removed when  
you save the copy.  
Start point  
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End  
point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be  
removed when you save the copy.  
End point  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Confirm the new start or end point.  
If the desired frame is not currently  
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance  
or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or  
back, rotate the main command dial  
one stop; to skip to an index, or to the  
first or last frame if the movie  
contains no indices, rotate the sub-command dial).  
6
7
Create the copy.  
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.  
Preview the movie.  
To preview the copy, highlight  
Preview and press J (to interrupt  
the preview and return to the save  
options menu, press 1). To abandon  
the current copy and return to Step 5,  
highlight Cancel and press J; to save  
the copy, proceed to Step 8.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Save the copy.  
Highlight Save as new file and press  
J to save the copy to a new file. To  
replace the original movie file with  
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite  
existing file and press J.  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved  
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.  
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.  
A Choosing the Role of the Current Frame  
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end point (x) instead of  
the new start point (w) or vice versa, press the L (Z/Q) button.  
L (Z/Q) button  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Selected Frames  
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:  
1
Pause the movie on the desired  
frame.  
Play the movie back as described on  
page 65, pressing the center of the  
multi selector to start and resume  
playback and 3 to pause. Pause the  
movie at the frame you intend to  
copy.  
2
Choose Save selected frame.  
Press the b button, then highlight  
Save selected frame and press 2.  
b button  
3
Create a still copy.  
Press 1 to create a still copy of the  
current frame.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J to create a  
fine-quality (0 79) JPEG copy of the  
selected frame.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not  
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo  
information (0 238).  
A The Retouch Menu  
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option in the retouch  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Recording Options  
Image Area  
Choose from image areas of FX (36×24) 1.0× (FX format),  
DX (24×16) 1.5× (DX format), 5 : 4 (30×24), and 1.2× (30×20)  
1.2×. See page 490 for information on the number of pictures  
that can be stored at different image area settings.  
FX format  
DX format (24×16)  
image circle  
DX format  
5 : 4  
1.2×  
FX format (36×24)  
image circle  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
❚❚ Image Area Options  
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:  
Option  
Description  
Images are recorded in FX format using the full  
area of the image sensor (35.9 × 24.0 mm),  
producing an angle of view equivalent to a  
NIKKOR lens on a 35mm format camera.  
A 30.0 × 19.9 mm area at the center of the image  
FX (36×24)  
1.0×  
(FX format)  
c
Z
1.2× (30×20) sensor is used to record photographs. To  
1.2×  
calculate the approximate focal length of the lens  
in 35mm format, multiply by 1.2.  
An area at the center of the image sensor  
23.4 × 15.6 mm is used to record pictures in DX  
format. To calculate the approximate focal length  
of the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.  
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4  
(30.0 × 24.0 mm).  
DX (24×16)  
1.5×  
(DX format)  
a
b
5 : 4 (30×24)  
❚❚ Automatic Crop Selection  
To automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens is attached,  
select On for Image area > Auto DX crop in the shooting menu  
(0 290). The image area selected in the shooting menu or with  
the camera controls will be used only when a non-DX lens is  
attached. Select Off to use the currently-selected image area  
with all lenses.  
D Auto DX Crop  
The controls listed on page 78 can not be used to select image area  
when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A Image Area  
The selected option is shown in the  
information display.  
A DX Lenses  
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a  
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35mm format cameras. If Auto  
DX crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is  
selected for Choose image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges  
of the image may be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the  
viewfinder, but when the images are played back you may notice a  
drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out.  
A The Viewfinder Display  
The 1.2×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below; the area outside  
the crop can be viewed in gray when Off is selected for Custom Setting  
a6 (AF point illumination, 0 310).  
1.2×  
A See Also  
DX format  
5 : 4  
See page 59 for information on the crops available in movie live view.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The image area can be selected using the Image area > Choose  
image area option in the shooting menu or by pressing a  
control and rotating a command dial.  
❚❚ The Image Area Menu  
1
2
3
Select Image area.  
Highlight Image area in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
Select Choose image area.  
Highlight Choose image area and  
press 2.  
Adjust settings.  
Choose an option and press J. The  
selected crop is displayed in the  
viewfinder (0 76).  
A Image Size  
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Camera Controls  
1
Assign image area selection to a camera control.  
Select Choose image area as the “press + command dials”  
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu  
(0 300). Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn  
button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, 0 343), the Pv  
button (Custom Setting f5, Assign preview button, 0 349),  
the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L  
button, 0 349), or the movie-record button (Custom Setting  
f13, Assign movie record button, 0 355).  
2
Use the selected control to  
choose an image area.  
The image area can be  
selected by pressing the  
selected button and  
rotating the main or sub-  
Fn button Main command  
command dial until the  
desired crop is displayed in  
the viewfinder (0 76).  
dial  
The option currently selected for  
image area can be viewed by  
pressing the button to display the  
image area in the control panel,  
viewfinder, or information display. FX  
format is displayed as “36 – 24, 1.2×  
as “30 – 20, DX format as “24 – 16, and 5 : 4 as “30 – 24.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Quality  
The D810 supports the following image quality options. See  
page 489 for information on the number of pictures that can be  
stored at different image quality and size settings.  
Option  
File type  
Description  
RAW data from the image sensor are saved  
without additional processing. Settings  
such as white balance and contrast can be  
adjusted after shooting.  
NEF (RAW)  
NEF  
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at  
a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit  
color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety  
of imaging applications.  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio  
of roughly 1:4 (fine quality). *  
TIFF (RGB) TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio  
of roughly 1:8 (normal quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio  
of roughly 1:16 (basic quality). *  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
JPEG  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG fine  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG normal  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)  
image and one fine-quality JPEG image.  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)  
image and one normal-quality JPEG image.  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)  
image and one basic-quality JPEG image.  
NEF/JPEG  
* Size priority selected for JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG compression. The  
compression ratio is an approximation only; the actual ratio varies with ISO sensitivity and the  
scene recorded.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Image quality is set by pressing the T button and rotating  
the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in  
the control panel.  
T button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
A NEF (RAW) Images  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software  
such as ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (ViewNX 2 can be installed from the  
supplied installer CD, while Capture NX-D can be downloaded from a  
link in the ViewNX 2 installer; 0 253). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 399).  
A NEF+JPEG  
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed  
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG  
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same  
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If  
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the  
Secondary slot function > RAW primary - JPEG secondary option,  
deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.  
A The Image Quality Menu  
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in  
the shooting menu (0 290).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ JPEG Compression  
To choose the type of compression for JPEG images, highlight  
JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG compression in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
Option  
Description  
Images are compressed to produce relatively  
uniform file size.  
Size priority  
O
P
Optimal image quality. File size varies with  
scene recorded.  
Optimal quality  
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Compression  
To choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images,  
highlight NEF (RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) compression in  
the shooting menu and press 2.  
Option  
Description  
NEF images are compressed using a reversible  
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%  
with no effect on image quality.  
NEF images are compressed using a non-  
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by  
about 35–55% with almost no effect on image  
quality.  
Lossless  
compressed  
N
O
Compressed  
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Bit Depth  
To choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images, highlight NEF  
(RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth in the shooting menu  
and press 2.  
Option  
Description  
12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.  
q
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits,  
14-bit producing files larger than those with a bit depth of  
12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.  
r
A See Also  
See page 83 for the image size options available for JPEG and TIFF  
images, page 85 for the image size options available for NEF (RAW)  
images.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. In the case of JPEG and TIFF  
images, you can choose from #Large, $Medium, or %Small  
(note that image size varies depending on the option selected  
for Image area, 0 74):  
Image area  
Option  
Large  
Size (pixels)  
7360 × 4912 62.3 × 41.6/24.5 × 16.4  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
FX (36×24)  
(FX format)  
Medium 5520 × 3680 46.7 × 31.2/18.4 × 12.3  
Small  
Large  
3680 × 2456 31.2 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2  
6144 × 4080 52.0 × 34.5/20.5 × 13.6  
1.2× (30×20)  
Medium 4608 × 3056 39.0 × 25.9/15.4 × 10.2  
Small  
Large  
3072 × 2040 26.0 × 17.3/10.2 × 6.8  
4800 × 3200 40.6 × 27.1/16.0 × 10.7  
DX (24×16)  
(DX format)  
Medium 3600 × 2400 30.5 × 20.3/12.0 × 8.0  
Small  
Large  
2400 × 1600 20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3  
6144 × 4912 52.0 × 41.6/20.5 × 16.4  
5 : 4 (30×24)  
Medium 4608 × 3680 39.0 × 31.2/15.4 × 12.3  
Small 3072 × 2456 26.0 × 20.8/10.2 × 8.2  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels  
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Image size for JPEG and TIFF images can be set by pressing the  
T button and rotating the sub-command dial until the  
desired option is displayed in the control panel.  
T button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
A The Image Size Menu  
Image size for JPEG and TIFF images can also be adjusted using the  
JPEG/TIFF recording > Image size option in the shooting menu  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Images  
When recording photographs in NEF  
(RAW) format, you can choose from sizes  
of o Large and p Small using the  
NEF (RAW) recording > Image size  
option in the shooting menu. Small-size  
images are about half the size of their  
large-size counterparts. An asterisk (U)  
appears in the control panel when  
p Small is selected.  
Control panel  
D NEF (RAW) Images  
Image size for NEF (RAW) photographs can not be selected using the  
T button and command dials. Small-size NEF (RAW) images are  
recorded in uncompressed 12-bit format, regardless of the options  
selected for NEF (RAW) compression and NEF (RAW) bit depth in the  
NEF (RAW) recording menu, and can not be retouched (0 384).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Two Memory Cards  
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can  
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot  
selection item in the shooting menu. Select SD card slot to  
designate the card in the SD card slot as the primary card, CF  
card slot to choose the CompactFlash card. The roles played by  
the primary and secondary cards can be chosen using the  
Secondary slot function option in the shooting menu. Choose  
from Overflow (the secondary card is used only when the  
primary card is full), Backup (each picture is recorded to both  
the primary and secondary card), and RAW primary - JPEG  
secondary (as for Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of  
photos recorded at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded  
only to the primary card and the JPEG copies only to the  
secondary card).  
D “Backup” and “RAW Primary - JPEG Secondary”  
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card  
with the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled  
when either card is full.  
A Recording Movies  
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to  
record movies can be selected using the Movie settings >  
Destination option in the shooting menu (0 63).  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Focus  
This section describes the focus options available when  
photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be  
adjusted automatically (see below) or manually (0 100). The  
user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual  
focus (0 94) or use focus lock to focus to recompose  
photographs after focusing (0 96).  
Autofocus  
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-mode  
selector to AF.  
Focus-mode selector  
Autofocus Mode  
The following autofocus modes can be selected during  
viewfinder photography:  
Mode  
Description  
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter  
can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed  
(focus priority; 0 307).  
AF-S  
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses  
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if  
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking  
(0 88) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as  
necessary. At default settings, shutter can be released whether  
or not subject is in focus (release priority; 0 306).  
AF-C  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Autofocus mode can be  
selected by pressing the  
AF-mode button and rotating  
the main command dial until  
the desired setting is displayed  
in the viewfinder and control  
panel.  
AF-mode button Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
A The B Button  
For the purpose of focusing the camera,  
pressing the B button has the same  
effect as pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
B button  
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the  
subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed. This  
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the  
subject will be when the shutter is released.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A See Also  
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see  
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 306). For information  
on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2  
(AF-S priority selection, 0 307). For information on preventing the  
camera from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway, see Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 308). See Custom  
Setting a12 (Autofocus mode restrictions, 0 314) for information on  
limiting focus-mode selection to AF-S or AF-C and f9 (Customize  
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 351) for information on  
using the sub-command dial to choose the focus mode. See page 39  
for information on the autofocus options available in live view or  
during movie recording.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point is selected during viewfinder  
photography.  
Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 94;  
the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point  
only. Use with stationary subjects.  
Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 94.  
In AF-C focus mode, the camera will focus based on information  
from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the  
selected point. The number of focus points varies with the  
mode selected:  
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose  
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are  
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).  
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects  
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football  
game).  
- 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects  
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the  
viewfinder (e.g., birds).  
3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 94. In  
AF-C focus mode, the camera will track subjects that leave the  
selected focus point and select new focus points as required.  
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving  
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject  
leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release  
button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the  
selected focus point.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Group-area AF: The camera focuses using a group of focus points  
selected by the user, reducing the risk of the camera focusing  
on the background instead of on the main subject. Choose for  
subjects that are difficult to photograph using a single focus  
point. If faces are detected in AF-S focus mode, the camera will  
give priority to portrait subjects.  
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically  
detects the subject and selects the  
focus point; if a face is detected, the  
camera will give priority to the portrait  
subject. The active focus points are  
highlighted briefly after the camera  
focuses; in AF-C mode, the main focus  
point remains highlighted after the other focus points have  
turned off.  
AF-area mode can be selected  
by pressing the AF-mode  
button and rotating the sub-  
command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the  
viewfinder and control panel.  
AF-mode button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A 3D-tracking  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the  
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.  
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with  
subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a  
very small area of the frame.  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.  
AF-area mode  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Single-point AF  
9-point dynamic-area AF *  
21-point dynamic-area AF *  
51-point dynamic-area AF *  
3D-tracking  
Group-area AF  
Auto-area AF  
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide  
information to assist focus operation.  
A Manual Focus  
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A See Also  
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before  
refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom  
Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 308). See Custom Setting  
a5 (Focus point illumination, 0 309) for information on choosing  
how the focus point is displayed in dynamic-area and group-area AF,  
a11 (Limit AF-area mode selection, 0 314) for information on  
limiting AF-area mode selection, and f9 (Customize command  
dials) > Change main/sub (0 351) for information on using the main  
command dial to choose the AF-area mode. See page 40 for  
information on the autofocus options available in live view or during  
movie recording.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Point Selection  
The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to  
compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost  
anywhere in the frame. Follow the steps below to choose the  
focus point (in group-area AF, you can follow these steps to  
choose a group of focus points).  
1
Rotate the focus selector lock to .  
This allows the multi selector to be  
used to select the focus point.  
Focus selector lock  
2
Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select the  
focus point in the viewfinder while  
the exposure meters are on. The  
center focus point can be selected by  
pressing the center of the multi  
selector.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The focus selector lock can be rotated  
to the locked (L) position following  
selection to prevent the selected  
focus point from changing when the  
multi selector is pressed.  
A Auto-area AF  
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual  
focus-point selection is not available.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing when and how the focus point is  
illuminated, see Custom Setting a5 (Focus point illumination, 0 309)  
and a6 (AF point illumination, 0 310). For information on setting  
focus-point selection to “wrap around,see Custom Setting a7 (Focus  
point wrap-around, 0 310). For information on choosing the  
number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector,  
see Custom Setting a8 (Number of focus points, 0 311). For  
information on choosing separate focus points and/or AF-area modes  
for vertical and horizontal orientations, see Custom Setting a9 (Store  
by orientation, 0 312). For information on changing the role of the  
multi selector center button, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector  
center button, 0 341).  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after  
focusing, making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be  
in a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable  
to focus using autofocus (0 87), focus lock can also be used to  
recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at  
the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most  
effective when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for  
AF-area mode (0 90).  
1
Focus.  
Position the subject in the  
selected focus point and  
press the shutter-release  
button halfway to initiate  
focus. Check that the in-  
focus indicator (I) appears  
in the viewfinder.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Lock focus.  
AF-C focus mode (0 87): With the  
shutter-release button pressed  
halfway (q), press the A AE-L/AF-L  
button (w) to lock both focus and  
exposure (an AE-L icon will be  
displayed in the viewfinder). Focus  
will remain locked while the  
A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even  
if you later remove your finger  
from the shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release button  
A AE-L/AF-L button  
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks  
automatically when the in-focus  
indicator (I) appears, and remain locked until you remove  
your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also  
be locked by pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button (see above).  
3
Recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked  
between shots if you keep  
the shutter-release button  
pressed halfway (AF-S) or  
keep the A AE-L/AF-L  
button pressed, allowing several photographs in succession  
to be taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the  
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus  
again at the new distance.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Locking Focus with the B Button  
During viewfinder photography, focus can be locked using the B  
button in place of the shutter-release button (0 88). If AF-ON only is  
selected for Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 308), the camera will  
not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; instead,  
the camera will focus when the B button is pressed, at which point  
focus will lock and remain locked until the B button is pressed  
again. The shutter can be released at any time, although the in-focus  
indicator (I) will not be displayed in the viewfinder. Note, however,  
that if Focus is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority  
selection, 0 307) and single-point AF is selected for AF-area mode,  
the shutter will not be released if the camera is unable to focus in  
single-servo autofocus mode.  
A See Also  
See Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 319) for  
information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,  
Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 349) for information  
on choosing the role played by A AE-L/AF-L button.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.  
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus  
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator () may be displayed  
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus  
(0 100) or use focus lock (0 96) to focus on another subject at the  
same distance and then recompose the photograph.  
There is little or no contrast between the subject and  
the background.  
Example: Subject is the same color as the  
background.  
The focus point contains objects at different  
distances from the camera.  
Example: Subject is inside a cage.  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric  
patterns.  
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a  
skyscraper.  
The focus point contains areas of sharply  
contrasting brightness.  
Example: Subject is half in the shade.  
Background objects appear larger than the subject.  
Example: A building is in the frame behind the  
subject.  
The subject contains many fine details.  
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that  
are small or lack variation in brightness.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support  
autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does  
not produce the desired results (0 99).  
AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode  
switch (if present) and camera focus-  
mode selector to M.  
Focus-mode selector  
D AF Lenses  
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and  
the camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the camera or lens. This does not apply to  
AF-S lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting the  
camera focus-mode selector to M.  
Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus  
ring until the image displayed on the  
clear matte field in the viewfinder is in  
focus. Photographs can be taken at any  
time, even when the image is not in  
focus.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder  
The viewfinder focus indicator can be  
used to confirm whether the subject in  
the selected focus point is in focus (the  
focus point can be selected from any of  
the 51 focus points). After positioning  
the subject in the selected focus point,  
press the shutter-release button halfway  
and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is  
displayed. Note that with the subjects listed on page 99, the in-  
focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is  
not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
For information on using the electronic rangefinder with  
optional AF-S/AF-I teleconverters, see page 423.  
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between  
your subject and the camera, measure  
from the focal plane mark (E) on the  
camera body (0 1). The distance  
46.5mm  
between the lens mounting flange and  
the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).  
Focal plane mark  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Release Mode  
Choosing a Release Mode  
To choose a release mode, press the  
release mode dial lock release and turn  
the release mode dial to the desired  
setting.  
Mode  
Description  
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-  
release button is pressed.  
S
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,  
camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom  
Setting d2 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 321). Lower built-in  
flash (0 190); continuous release is not available while flash is  
raised.  
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,  
camera takes photographs at frame rate given on page 104.  
Use for active subjects. Lower built-in flash (0 190);  
continuous release is not available while flash is raised.  
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does  
not click back into place while shutter-release button is fully  
pressed, allowing user to control timing of click made by  
mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. In  
addition, beep does not sound regardless of setting selected  
for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 321).  
T
U
J
Qc (quiet continuous) shutter-release: While shutter-release button  
is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate given  
on page 104. Camera noise is reduced. Lower built-in flash  
(0 190); continuous release is not available while flash is  
raised.  
M
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Mode  
Description  
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 106).  
E
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in  
telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in  
which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred  
photographs (0 108).  
V
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Power Source and Frame Rate  
The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source  
and image area. The figures below are the average maximum  
frame rates available with continuous-servo AF, manual or  
shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1  
250 s or faster,  
/
settings other than Custom Setting d2 at default values, and  
memory remaining in the memory buffer.  
Maximum frame rate (fps) 1  
Power source  
Camera with EN-EL15  
Image area  
U
T
FX, 5 : 4  
1.2×, DX  
FX, 5 : 4  
1.2×  
5
6
5
6
Camera with EP-5B power connector  
and EH-5b AC adapter  
DX  
7
FX, 5 : 4  
1.2×, DX  
FX, 5 : 4  
1.2×  
5
6
5
6
Camera with MB-D12 (EN-EL15)  
Camera with MB-D12 (EN-EL18)  
1–6  
DX  
7
FX, 5 : 4  
1.2×  
5
6
Camera with MB-D12 (AA 2)  
DX  
7
1
Maximum frame rate when FX (36 × 24) or 5 : 4 (30 × 24) is selected for image area is  
5 fps even if higher values are selected for Custom Setting d2 (CL mode shooting  
speed, 0 321).  
2
AA-size batteries. Frame rates may drop at low temperatures or when batteries are low.  
The stated rates may not be available under some conditions.  
Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or very small apertures  
(high f-numbers) or when vibration reduction (available with VR  
lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control is on (0 111) or the battery  
is low. In M mode, frame rate is fixed at about 3 fps.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,  
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to  
the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession;  
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (tAA).  
The approximate number of images that  
can be stored in the memory buffer at  
current settings is shown in the exposure-  
count displays in the viewfinder and  
control panel while the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. The illustration  
at right shows the display when space  
remains in the buffer for about 58 pictures.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the  
memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting  
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a  
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or  
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone  
out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the  
power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been  
recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,  
the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the  
memory card.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs  
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.  
continuous release, 0 322). For information on the number of  
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 489.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Self-Timer Mode (E)  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-  
portraits.  
1
2
Mount the camera on a tripod.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a  
stable, level surface.  
Select self-timer mode.  
Press the release mode  
dial lock release and turn  
the release mode dial to  
E.  
Release mode dial  
3
Frame the photograph and focus.  
In single-servo AF (0 87), photographs can only  
be taken if the in-focus (I) indicator appears in  
the viewfinder.  
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
When taking photos without your eye to  
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder  
eyepiece shutter to prevent light  
entering via the viewfinder from  
appearing in photographs or interfering  
with exposure.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
Start the timer.  
Press the shutter-release  
button all the way down  
to start the timer. The  
self-timer lamp will start  
to flash. Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the  
self-timer lamp will stop flashing. The shutter will be released  
about ten seconds after the timer starts.  
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the  
release mode dial to another setting.  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash, press the flash pop-up  
button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in  
the viewfinder (0 189). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is  
raised after the self-timer has started. Note that only one photograph  
will be taken when the flash fires, regardless of the number of  
exposures selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 319).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number  
of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3  
(Self-timer, 0 319). For information on controlling the beeps that  
sound when the self-timer is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep,  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mirror up Mode (V)  
Choose this mode to  
minimize blurring caused by  
camera movement when the  
mirror is raised. To use mirror-  
up mode, press the release  
mode dial lock release and  
rotate the release mode dial  
to V (mirror up). After  
Release mode dial  
pressing the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and  
exposure, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way  
down to raise the mirror and then press the shutter-release  
button all the way down again to take the picture. A beep will  
sound, unless Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep,  
0 321). The mirror lowers when shooting ends.  
D Mirror Up  
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder  
and autofocus and metering will not be performed.  
A Mirror up Mode  
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for  
about 30 s with the mirror raised.  
A Preventing Blur  
To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutter-  
release button smoothly. Use of a tripod is recommended.  
A See Also  
For information on using the electronic front-curtain shutter to further  
reduce blur, see Custom Setting d5 (Electronic front-curtain shutter,  
0 323).  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ISO Sensitivity  
Manual Adjustment  
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the  
amount of light available. Choose from settings that range from  
ISO 64 to ISO 12800 in steps equivalent to 1  
3 EV. Settings of from  
/
about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 64 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO 12800  
are also available for special situations. The higher the ISO  
sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing  
higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.  
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted  
by pressing the S button and  
rotating the main command  
dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panel  
or viewfinder.  
S button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A The Shooting Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted from the shooting menu. Choose  
ISO sensitivity settings to adjust settings for viewfinder and live view  
photography (0 290) and Movie settings > Movie ISO sensitivity  
settings to adjust settings for movie live view (0 64).  
A ISO Sensitivity  
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an  
exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the  
more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels, fog, or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings  
between Hi 0.3 and Hi 2.  
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2  
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities  
0.3–2 EV over ISO 12800 (ISO 16000–51200 equivalent).  
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1  
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities  
0.3–1 EV below ISO 64 (ISO 50–32 equivalent). Use for larger apertures  
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most  
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 64 or above are recommended.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom  
Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value; 0 315). For information on  
displaying ISO sensitivity in the control panel or adjusting ISO  
sensitivity without using the S button, see Custom Setting d8 (ISO  
display and adjustment; 0 325). For information on using the High  
ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO  
sensitivities, see page 299.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO  
sensitivity control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will  
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be  
achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is  
adjusted appropriately when the flash is used).  
1
Select Auto ISO sensitivity control.  
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the  
shooting menu, then highlight Auto  
ISO sensitivity control and press 2.  
2
Select On.  
Highlight On and press J (if Off is  
selected, ISO sensitivity will remain  
fixed at the value selected by the  
user).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Adjust settings.  
The maximum value for auto ISO  
sensitivity can be selected using  
Maximum sensitivity (note that if  
the ISO sensitivity selected by the  
user is higher than that chosen for  
Maximum sensitivity, the value  
selected by the user will be used instead). In exposure modes  
e and g, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure  
would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum  
shutter speed (1  
4000–30 s, or Auto; in modes f and h, ISO  
/
sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the  
shutter speed selected by the user). If Auto is selected, the  
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the  
focal length of the lens. Press J to exit when settings are  
complete.  
When On is selected, the viewfinder  
and control panel show Z.  
When sensitivity is altered from the  
value selected by the user, these  
indicators flash and the altered value is  
shown in the viewfinder.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Minimum Shutter Speed  
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto  
and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected  
automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note,  
however, that Auto functions only with CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is  
used without lens data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at 1  
30 s.  
/
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum  
exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for  
Maximum sensitivity.  
A Enabling and Disabling Auto ISO Senstivity Control  
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on  
or off by pressing the S button and  
rotating the sub-command dial.  
Z is displayed when auto ISO  
sensitivity control is on.  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at  
higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu  
to reduce noise (see page 299). When a flash is used, minimum shutter  
speed will be set to the value selected for Minimum shutter speed  
unless this value is faster than Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed,  
0 329) or slower than Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed,  
0 331), in which case the value selected for Custom Setting e2 will be  
used instead. Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically  
when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow  
sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional  
flash units listed on page 428), possibly preventing the camera from  
selecting slow shutter speeds.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Metering  
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The  
following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera  
meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to  
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D  
lenses (0 422), distance information (3D color matrix metering  
III; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III,  
which does not include 3D distance information).  
L
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest  
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be  
selected using Custom Setting b6, Center-weighted area,  
0 317; if non-CPU lens is attached, area is equivalent to circle  
12 mm in diameter). Classic meter for portraits; recommended  
when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.  
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter  
M
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current  
focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if  
non-CPU lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will  
meter center focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly  
exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.  
Highlight-weighted: Camera assigns greatest weight to highlights.  
Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when  
photographing spotlit performers on a stage.  
N
4
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
To choose a metering option, press the c button and rotate the  
main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the  
viewfinder and control panel.  
c button Main command  
dial  
A Non-CPU Lens Data  
Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses  
using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu (0 229)  
allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is selected  
and improves the accuracy of center-weighted and spot metering.  
Center-weighted metering will be used if highlight-weighted metering  
is selected with non-CPU lenses or if matrix metering is selected with  
non-CPU lenses for which lens data have not been supplied. Note that  
center-weighted metering may also be used if highlight-weighted  
metering is selected with certain CPU lenses (AI-P NIKKOR lenses and  
AF lenses that are not of type G, E, or D).  
A See Also  
See Custom Setting b5 (Matrix metering, 0 317) for information on  
choosing whether matrix metering uses face detection. For  
information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for  
each metering method, see Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal  
exposure, 0 318).  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exposure Mode  
To determine how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture  
when adjusting exposure, press the I (Q) button and rotate  
the main command dial until the desired option appears in the  
control panel.  
I (Q) button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
Description  
Mode  
Programmed auto (0 118): Camera sets shutter speed and  
aperture for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots  
and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust  
camera settings.  
e
Shutter-priority auto (0 119): User chooses shutter speed;  
camera selects aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur  
motion.  
Aperture-priority auto (0 120): User chooses aperture; camera  
selects shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background  
or bring both foreground and background into focus.  
Manual (0 121): User controls both shutter speed and aperture.  
Set shutter speed to Bulb (A) or Time (&) for long time-  
exposures.  
f
g
h
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Lens Types  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 422), lock  
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G  
and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
When using non-CPU lenses (0 229), select exposure mode g  
(aperture-priority auto) or h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode  
g is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 419,  
424). The exposure mode indicator (e or f) will flash in the control  
panel and A will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
A Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press  
and hold the Pv button. The lens will be  
stopped down to the aperture value  
selected by the camera (modes e and f) or  
the value chosen by the user (modes g and  
h), allowing depth of field to be previewed  
in the viewfinder.  
Pv button  
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash  
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units  
that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 428) will emit  
a modeling flash when the Pv button is pressed. See page 338 for more  
information.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed  
and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal  
exposure in most situations.  
A Flexible Program  
In exposure mode e, different  
combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture can be selected by rotating the  
main command dial while the exposure  
meters are on (“flexible program”). Rotate  
the dial to the right for large apertures (low  
f-numbers) that blur background details or  
Main command dial  
fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion.  
Rotate the dial to the left for small  
apertures (high f-numbers) that increase  
depth of field or slow shutter speeds that  
blur motion. All combinations produce  
the same exposure. While flexible  
program is in effect, an asterisk (“U”)  
appears in the control panel. To restore  
default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the dial until the  
asterisk is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the  
camera off.  
A See Also  
See page 458 for information on the built-in exposure program. For  
information on activating the exposure meters, see “The Standby  
Timer” on page 34.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
f: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the  
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the  
optimal exposure.  
To choose a shutter speed, rotate the  
main command dial while the exposure  
meters are on. Shutter speed can be set  
to “p” or to values between 30 s  
and 1  
at the selected setting (0 126).  
/8000 s. Shutter speed can be locked  
Main command dial  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
g: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the  
camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce  
the optimal exposure.  
To choose an aperture between the  
minimum and maximum values for the  
lens, rotate the sub-command dial  
while the exposure meters are on.  
Aperture can be locked at the selected  
setting (0 126).  
Sub-command dial  
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 419, 424)  
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust  
aperture. If the maximum aperture of the  
lens has been specified using the Non-  
CPU lens data item in setup menu (0 230)  
when a non-CPU lens is attached, the  
current f-number will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and control panel, rounded to  
the nearest full stop. Otherwise the  
aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with  
maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be read  
from the lens aperture ring.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
h: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and  
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main  
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command  
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to  
values between 30 s and 1  
8000 s, or the shutter can be held open  
/
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A or &, 0 123).  
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and  
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to  
check exposure.  
Sub-command dial  
Aperture  
Shutter speed  
Main command dial  
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio  
need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to  
set aperture.  
A Exposure Indicators  
If a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the exposure  
indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show whether the  
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.  
Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for  
exposure cntrl, 0 315), the amount of under- or over-exposure is  
shown in increments of 1  
/
3EV, 1  
2EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure  
/
metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.  
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step  
Underexposed by Overexposed by over  
Optimal exposure  
1
/
3 EV  
3 EV  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
A See Also  
For information on reversing the exposure indicators so that negative  
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see  
Custom Setting f12 (Reverse indicators, 0 354).  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Long Time-Exposures (h Mode Only)  
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of  
moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.  
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while the shutter-  
release button is held down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or an  
optional wireless remote controller (0 441) or remote cord  
(0 439).  
Time (&): Start the exposure by using the shutter-release  
button on the camera or on an optional remote cord, or  
wireless remote controller. The shutter remains open until the  
button is pressed a second time.  
Length of exposure: 35 s  
Aperture: f/25  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1
2
Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level  
surface.  
A Long Time-Exposures  
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via  
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering  
with exposure (0 106). Nikon recommends using a fully charged  
battery or an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent  
loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright  
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may be present in  
long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the Long  
exposure NR option in the shooting menu (0 299).  
Select exposure mode h.  
Press the I (Q) button and rotate the main command dial  
until h is displayed in the control panel.  
I (Q) button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Choose a shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on,  
rotate the main command dial to  
choose a shutter speed of Bulb  
(A) or Time (&). The exposure  
indicators do not appear when Bulb  
(A) or Time (&) is selected.  
Bulb  
Time  
4
5
Open the shutter.  
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the  
camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote controller  
all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed  
until the exposure is complete.  
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.  
Close the shutter.  
Bulb: Remove your finger from the shutter-release button.  
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock  
Shutter speed lock is available in shutter-priority auto and  
manual exposure modes, aperture lock in aperture-priority auto  
and manual exposure modes. Shutter speed and aperture lock  
are not available in programmed auto exposure mode.  
1
Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera control.  
Select Shutter spd & aperture lock as the “press + command  
dials” option in the Custom Settings menu (0 348). Shutter  
speed and aperture lock can be assigned to the Fn button  
(Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, 0 343), the Pv button  
(Custom Setting f5, Assign preview button, 0 349), or the  
A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L  
button, 0 349).  
2
Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.  
Shutter speed (exposure modes fand h): Press the selected button  
and rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in  
the viewfinder and control panel.  
Fn button Main command  
dial  
To unlock shutter speed, press the button and rotate the  
main command dial until the F icons disappear from the  
displays.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Aperture (exposure modes gand h): Press the selected button and  
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the  
viewfinder and the control panel.  
Fn button  
Sub-command  
dial  
To unlock aperture, press the button and rotate the sub-  
command dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.  
A See Also  
Use Custom Setting f7 (Shutter spd & aperture lock; 0 350) to keep  
shutter speed and/or aperture locked at the selected values.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Autoexposure (AE) Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using  
center-weighted metering and spot metering (0 114) to meter  
exposure.  
1
Lock exposure.  
Shutter-release button  
Position the subject in the selected  
focus point and press the shutter-  
release button halfway. With the  
shutter-release button pressed  
halfway and the subject positioned  
in the focus point, press the A AE-L/  
AF-L button to lock exposure (if you  
are using autofocus, confirm that the  
in-focus indicator (I) appears in the  
viewfinder).  
A AE-L/AF-L button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an  
AE-L indicator will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
2
Recompose the  
photograph.  
Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L  
button pressed,  
recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a  
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-  
weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a  
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted  
without altering the metered value for exposure:  
Exposure mode  
Setting  
e
f
g
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 118)  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.  
Note that the metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in  
effect.  
A See Also  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,  
0 319), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. For information on changing the role of the A AE-L/AF-L  
button, see Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 349).  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It  
is most effective when used with center-weighted or spot  
metering (0 114). Choose from values between –5 EV  
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of  
1
/
3 EV. In general, positive values make the subject brighter while  
negative values make it darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure  
compensation  
+1 EV  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To choose a value for exposure  
compensation, press the E button and  
rotate the main command dial until the  
desired value is displayed in the control  
panel or viewfinder.  
E button  
Main command dial  
0 EV  
–0.3 (–1  
/3) EV  
+2.0 EV  
(E button pressed)  
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the  
center of the exposure indicators will  
flash (exposure modes e, f, and g only)  
and a E icon will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and control panel after you  
release the E button. The current value  
for exposure compensation can be  
confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E button.  
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure  
compensation to 0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset  
when the camera is turned off.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Exposure Mode h  
In exposure mode h, exposure compensation affects only the  
exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for  
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp.  
step value, 0 315). For information on making adjustments to  
exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom  
Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation, 0 316). For information  
on restricting the effects of exposure compensation to the background  
when using a flash for foreground lighting, see Custom Setting e4  
(Exposure comp. for flash, 0 338). For information on automatically  
varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see  
page 133.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active  
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,  
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is  
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,  
auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 194, 331, and  
430), white balance, or Active D-Lighting and there is not time to  
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to  
experiment with different settings for the same subject.  
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs.  
Exposure modified by:  
0 EV  
Exposure modified by:  
–1 EV  
Exposure modified by:  
+1 EV  
1
Select flash or exposure bracketing.  
Select Custom Setting e6 (Auto  
bracketing set) in the Custom  
Settings menu, highlight an option,  
and press J. Choose AE & flash to  
vary both exposure and flash level,  
AE only to vary only exposure, or  
Flash only to vary only flash level.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
D button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing indicator  
At settings other than zero, a M  
icon and exposure and flash  
bracketing indicator will appear in  
the control panel and D will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Select an exposure increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the exposure increment.  
Exposure increment  
D button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen  
from 0.3 (1  
/
3), 0.7 (2  
3), 1, 2, and 3 EV. The bracketing programs  
/
with an increment of 0.3 (1  
3) EV are listed below.  
/
No. of  
shots  
Control panel display  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
0
0/+0.3/+0.7  
0/–0.7/–0.3  
0/+0.3  
0/–0.3  
0/–0.3/+0.3  
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7  
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7/+1.0  
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/  
+0.7/+1.0/+1.3  
9
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the  
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected  
in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level  
shot-by-shot according to the bracketing  
program selected. Modifications to exposure are  
added to those made with exposure compensation (see page  
130).  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator  
will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will  
disappear from the indicator after each shot.  
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7  
Display after first shot  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see  
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 315). For  
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,  
see Custom Setting e8 (Bracketing order, 0 340). For information on  
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f8 (Assign  
BKT button, 0 350).  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The  
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a  
two-button reset (0 206), although in this case the bracketing  
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated.  
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
In continuous release modes (0 102), shooting will pause after the  
number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.  
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is  
pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots  
selected in Step 2 on page 134 each time the shutter-release button is  
pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-  
timer) > Number of shots (0 319); the interval between shots is  
however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval  
between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted  
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before  
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from  
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture  
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed  
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for  
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 111) in  
modes e, f, and g, the camera will modify exposure by varying ISO  
sensitivity and only vary shutter speed and/or aperture if the limits of  
exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting e7 (Auto bracketing  
(mode M), 0 339) can be used to change how the camera performs  
exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode. Bracketing  
can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed  
and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing  
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each  
with a different white balance. For more information on white  
1
Select white balance bracketing.  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom  
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.  
2
Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
D button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
WB bracketing indicator  
At settings other than zero, a W  
icon and WB bracketing indicator will  
appear in the control panel and D  
will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Select a white balance increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is  
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.  
White balance increment  
D button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3  
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts  
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber  
(0 151). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are  
listed below.  
No. of White balance  
Control panel display  
Bracketing order  
shots  
increment  
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
1
1 B  
1 A  
1 B  
1 A  
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
0
0/1 B/2 B  
0/2 A/1 A  
0/1 B  
0/1 A  
0/1 A/1 B  
0/2 A/1 A/1 B/2 B  
0/3 A/2 A/1 A /  
1 B/2 B/3 B  
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/  
1 B/2 B/3 B/4 B  
7
9
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
Each shot will be processed to create  
the number of copies specified in the  
bracketing program, and each copy will have a different  
white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to  
the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-  
tuning.  
If the number of shots in the  
bracketing program is greater than  
the number of exposures  
remaining, n and the icon for  
the affected card will flash in the  
control panel, a flashing j icon  
will appear in the viewfinder as  
shown at right, and the shutter  
release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new  
memory card is inserted.  
A See Also  
See page 154 for a definition of “mired.”  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The  
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a  
two-button reset (0 206), although in this case the bracketing  
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated.  
A White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF  
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic cancels white balance  
bracketing.  
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-  
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 151). No  
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.  
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white-  
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released,  
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) >  
Number of shots (0 319).  
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the  
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have  
been recorded.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ ADL Bracketing  
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.  
For more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 182.  
1
2
Select ADL bracketing.  
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom  
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.  
Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
D button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
ADL bracketing indicator  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
At settings other than zero, a d icon and an ADL  
bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel and D  
will be displayed in the viewfinder. Choose two shots to take  
one photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a  
selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of  
photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and  
Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High (four  
shots), or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra high (five shots).  
If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.  
3
Select Active D-Lighting.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose Active D-Lighting.  
D button  
Sub-command dial  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.  
Control panel display  
Active D-Lighting  
Y
R
Q
P
Z
Auto  
Low  
Normal  
High  
Extra high  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-  
shot according to the bracketing program  
selected. While bracketing is in effect, a  
bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control  
panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each  
shot.  
No. shots: 3  
Display after first shot  
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The  
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a  
two-button reset (0 206), although in this case the bracketing  
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A ADL Bracketing  
In continuous release modes (0 102), shooting will pause after the  
number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.  
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is  
pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots  
selected in Step 2 on page 143 each time the shutter-release button is  
pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-  
timer) > Number of shots (0 319); the interval between shots is  
however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval  
between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted  
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before  
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from  
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance  
White Balance Options  
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of  
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most  
light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with  
auto white balance, choose an option from the list below.  
Option  
Color temp. *  
3500–8000 K  
3000 K  
Auto  
Normal  
v
Keep warm lighting colors  
Incandescent  
J
I
Fluorescent  
Sodium-vapor lamps  
Warm-white fluorescent  
White fluorescent  
Cool-white fluorescent  
Day white fluorescent  
Daylight fluorescent  
High temp. mercury-vapor  
Direct sunlight  
2700 K  
3000 K  
3700 K  
4200 K  
5000 K  
6500 K  
7200 K  
5200 K  
H
N
Flash  
5400 K  
6000 K  
Cloudy  
G
M
K
Shade  
8000 K  
Choose color temp. (0 155)  
Preset manual (0 158)  
2500–10,000 K  
L
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
White balance can be selected by pressing the U button and  
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panel.  
U button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in  
the shooting menu (0 290), which also can be used to fine-tune white  
balance (0 151) or measure a value for preset manual white balance  
(0 158). The Auto option in the White balance menu offers a choice  
of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which preserves the warm  
colors produced by incandescent lighting, while the I Fluorescent  
option can be used to select the light source from the bulb types.  
A Studio Flash Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large  
studio flash units. Use preset manual white balance or set white  
balance to Flash and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.  
A See Also  
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0 338), the camera will create several images each  
time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each  
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See  
page 139 for more information.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other  
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a  
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an  
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the  
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower  
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly  
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear  
tinged with blue.  
“Warmer” (redder) colors  
“Cooler” (bluer) colors  
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!
!
J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K  
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K  
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K  
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K  
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K  
N (flash): 5400 K  
G (cloudy): 6000 K  
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K  
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K  
M (shade): 8000 K  
Note: All figures are approximate.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.), white balance  
can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of  
the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an  
image.  
❚❚ The White Balance Menu  
To fine-tune white balance from the shooting menu, select  
White balance and follow the steps below.  
1
2
Display fine-tuning options.  
Highlight a white balance option and  
press 2 (if a sub-menu is displayed,  
select the desired option and press 2  
again to display fine-tuning options;  
for information on fine-tuning preset  
manual white balance, see page 169).  
Fine-tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune  
white balance. White balance can be  
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)  
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–  
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The  
horizontal (amber-blue) axis  
Coordinates  
Adjustment  
corresponds to color temperature,  
while the vertical (green-magenta)  
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color  
compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in  
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in  
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Press J.  
Press J to save settings and return to  
the shooting menu. If white balance  
has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”)  
will be displayed in the control panel.  
J button  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ The UButton  
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset  
manual), the U button can be used to fine-tune white balance  
on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 151; to fine-tune white  
balance when L is selected, use the shooting menu as  
described on page 151). Press the U button and rotate the  
sub-command dial to fine-tune white balance in steps of 0.5  
(with each full increment equivalent to about 5 mired), stopping  
when the desired value is displayed in the control panel. Rotate  
the dial left to increase the amount of amber (A), right to  
increase the amount of blue (B). At settings other than 0, an  
asterisk (“U”) appears in the control panel.  
U button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A White Balance Fine-Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For  
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as  
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make  
photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
A “Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference  
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color  
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much  
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by  
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is  
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired  
7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choosing a Color Temperature  
Follow the steps below to choose a color temperature when K  
(Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance.  
D Choose Color Temperature  
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or  
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these  
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the  
selected value is appropriate.  
❚❚ The White Balance Menu  
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance  
options in the shooting menu. Enter values for the amber–blue  
and green–magenta axes (0 151) as described below.  
1
Select Choose color temp.  
Select White balance in the shooting  
menu, then highlight Choose color  
temp. and press 2.  
2
Select a value for amber-blue.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and  
press 1 or 3 to change.  
Value for amber (A)-  
blue (B) axis  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Select a value for green-magenta.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G  
(green) or M (magenta) axis and press  
1 or 3 to select a value.  
Value for green (G)-  
magenta (M) axis  
Press J.  
Press J to save changes and return  
to the shooting menu. If a value  
other than 0 is selected for the green  
(G)–magenta (M) axis, an asterisk  
(“U”) will be displayed in the control  
panel.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ The UButton  
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected, the U button can  
be used to select the color temperature, although only for the  
amber (A)–blue (B) axis. Press the U button and rotate the sub-  
command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control  
panel (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 154). To enter a color  
temperature directly, press the U button and press 4 or 2 to  
highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to change.  
U button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance  
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for  
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to  
six values for preset manual white balance in presets d-1  
through d-6. Two methods are available for setting preset  
manual white balance:  
Method  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under  
lighting that will be used in final photo and white  
balance is measured by camera (0 159). In live  
view photography and movie live view (0 35, 49),  
white balance can be measured in a selected area  
of the frame (spot white balance, 0 163).  
Direct measurement  
Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory  
photograph card (0 167).  
A White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Viewfinder Photography  
1
Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that  
will be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a  
standard gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note  
that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when  
measuring white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust  
exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 (0 122).  
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).  
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until  
L is displayed in the control panel.  
U button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)  
Preset manual white balance can not be measured while you are  
shooting an HDR photograph (0 184) or multiple exposure (0 209), or  
when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign  
shutter button, 0 364) and the live view selector is rotated to 1.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Select a preset.  
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until  
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in  
the control panel.  
U button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
Select direct measurement mode.  
Release the U button briefly and  
then press the button until the L  
icon in the control panel starts to  
flash. A flashing D will also  
appear in the viewfinder. The  
displays will flash for about six  
seconds.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and  
press the shutter-release button all the way  
down. The camera will measure a value for white balance and  
store it in the preset selected in Step 3. No photograph will  
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even  
when the camera is not in focus.  
Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a  
value for white balance, C will  
flash in the control panel for about  
six seconds, while the viewfinder  
will show a flashing a.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
If lighting is too dark or too bright,  
the camera may be unable to  
measure white balance. A flashing  
b a will appear in the control  
panel and viewfinder for about six  
Control panel  
seconds. Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to return to Step 5  
and measure white balance again.  
Viewfinder  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Direct Measurement Mode  
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while  
the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the  
time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319).  
A Protected Presets  
If the current preset is protected (0 169), 3 will flash in the control  
panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value.  
A Selecting a Preset  
Selecting Preset manual for the White  
balance option in the shooting menu  
displays the dialog shown at right; highlight  
a preset and press J. If no value currently  
exists for the selected preset, white balance  
will be set to 5200 K, the same as Direct  
sunlight.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live View (Spot White Balance)  
In live view photography and movie live view (0 35, 49), white  
balance can be measured in a selected area of the frame,  
eliminating the need to prepare a reference object or change  
lenses during telephoto photography.  
1
Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised and the view  
through the lens will be displayed in  
the camera monitor.  
a button  
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).  
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until  
L is displayed in the control panel.  
U button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Select a preset.  
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until  
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in  
the control panel.  
U button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
4
5
Select direct measurement mode.  
Release the U button briefly and  
then press the button until the L  
icon in the control panel starts to  
flash. A spot white balance target  
(r) will be displayed at the selected  
focus point.  
Control panel  
Position the target over a white or grey area.  
While L flashes in the display, use  
the multi selector to position the r  
over a white or grey area of the  
subject. To zoom the area around the  
target in for more precise positioning,  
press the X button.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Measure white balance.  
Press the center of the multi selector  
or press the shutter-release button all  
the way down to measure white  
balance. The time available to  
measure white balance is that  
selected for Custom Setting c4  
(Monitor off delay) > Live view  
(0 320).  
If the camera is unable to measure  
white balance, the message shown at  
right will be displayed. Choose a new  
white balance target and repeat the  
process from Step 5.  
7
Exit direct measurement mode.  
Press the U button to exit direct measurement mode.  
When Preset manual is selected for  
White balance in the shooting  
menu, the position of the target used  
to measure preset manual white  
balance will be displayed on presets  
recorded during live view  
photography and movie live view.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View)  
Preset manual white balance can not be measured when Record  
movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button,  
0 364) and the live view selector is rotated to 1. Preset manual white  
balance can not be set while an HDR exposure is in progress (0 184) or  
when a setting other than None is selected for photo live view display  
white balance (monitor hue; 0 43).  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Presets  
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an  
existing photograph to a selected preset.  
1
2
3
4
Select Preset manual.  
Select White balance in the shooting  
menu, then highlight Preset manual  
and press 2.  
Select a destination.  
Highlight the destination preset (d-1  
to d-6) and press the center of the  
multi selector.  
Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
Highlight a source image.  
Highlight the source image.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Copy white balance.  
Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted  
photograph has a comment (0 375), the comment will be  
copied to the comment for the selected preset.  
A Choosing a Source Image  
To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame, press and hold the  
X button.  
X button  
To view images in other locations, press W. The dialog shown below  
will be displayed; select the desired card and folder.  
W button  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Choosing a White Balance Preset  
Press 1 to highlight the current white  
balance preset (d-1d-6) and press 2 to  
select another preset.  
A Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance  
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by  
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white  
A Edit Comment  
To enter a descriptive comment of up to  
36 characters for the current white-  
balance preset, select Edit comment in  
the preset manual white balance menu  
and enter a comment as described on  
A Protect  
To protect the current white-balance  
preset, select Protect in the preset  
manual white balance menu, then  
highlight On and press J. Protected  
presets can not be modified and the Fine-  
tune and Edit comment options can not  
be used.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Enhancement  
Picture Controls  
Selecting a Picture Control  
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of  
scene.  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results.  
Recommended for most situations.  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose  
for photographs that will later be processed or  
retouched.  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint  
effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize  
primary colors.  
Standard  
Q
R
Neutral  
Vivid  
S
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
T
o
p
Process portraits for skin with natural texture  
and a rounded feel.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,  
from highlights to shadows. Choose for  
photographs that will later be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
Flat  
q
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
1
2
Press L (Z/Q).  
A list of Picture Controls will be  
displayed.  
L (Z/Q) button  
Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight a Picture Control and press  
J.  
J button  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing  
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the  
shooting menu (0 177). Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a  
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and  
compatible software (0 180).  
A The Picture Control Indicator  
The current Picture Control is shown in the  
information display when the R button is  
pressed.  
Picture Control indicator  
A The Shooting Menu  
Picture Controls can also be selected using the Set Picture Control  
option in the shooting menu (0 290).  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 177) can be  
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a  
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make  
manual adjustments to individual settings.  
1
Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture Control  
in the Picture Control list (0 170) and  
press 2.  
2
Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired  
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a  
value in increments of 1, or rotate the  
sub-command dial to choose a value  
in increments of 0.25 (0 174).  
Repeat this step until all settings have  
been adjusted, or select a preset combination of settings by  
using the multi selector to choose Quick adjust. Default  
settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.  
3
Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified  
from default settings are indicated by an  
asterisk (“U”) in the Set Picture Control  
menu.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture  
Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).  
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, Flat, or  
custom Picture Controls (0 177).  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust  
Sharpening sharpening automatically according to the type of  
scene.  
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the camera  
adjust clarity automatically. Depending on the scene,  
Clarity  
shadows may appear around bright objects or halos  
may appear around dark objects at some settings.  
Clarity is not applied to movies.  
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera  
adjust contrast automatically.  
Contrast  
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in  
highlights or shadows.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust  
Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of  
scene.  
Hue  
Adjust hue.  
Filter  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome  
effects  
photographs (0 175).  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs  
Toning  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with  
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G, E,  
or D lens for best results.  
A Switching Between Manual and Auto  
Press the X button to switch back and forth  
between manual and auto (A) settings for  
sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.  
A Previous Settings  
The h indicator under the value display in  
the Picture Control setting menu indicates  
the previous value for the setting. Use this as  
a reference when adjusting settings.  
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on  
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Description  
Y
Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the  
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange  
produces more contrast than yellow, red more contrast  
than orange.  
O
Orange  
Red  
R
G
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more  
pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected  
displays saturation options. Press 4 or 2  
to adjust saturation in increments of 1, or  
rotate the sub-command dial to choose a  
value in increments of 0.25. Saturation  
control is not available when B&W (black-  
and-white) is selected.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as  
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be  
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.  
1
2
3
4
Select Manage Picture Control.  
Highlight Manage Picture Control  
in the shooting menu and press 2.  
Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.  
Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture Control  
and press 2, or press J to proceed to  
Step 5 to save a copy of the  
highlighted Picture Control without  
further modification.  
Edit the selected Picture Control.  
See page 174 for more information.  
To abandon any changes and start  
over from default settings, press the  
O (Q) button. Press J when settings  
are complete.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
6
Select a destination.  
Choose a destination for the custom  
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and  
press 2.  
Name the Picture Control.  
Keyboard area  
The text-entry dialog shown at right  
will be displayed. By default, new  
Picture Controls are named by  
adding a two-digit number (assigned  
automatically) to the name of the  
existing Picture Control; to use the  
default name, proceed to Step 7. To  
move the cursor in the name area,  
Name area  
hold the W button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter  
at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to  
highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and  
press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character  
at the current cursor position, press the O (Q) button.  
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen  
characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be  
deleted.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Save changes and exit.  
Press J to save changes and exit.  
The new Picture Control will appear  
in the Picture Control list.  
J button  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at  
any time using the Rename option in the  
Manage Picture Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu can be used to delete  
selected custom Picture Controls when  
they are no longer needed.  
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which  
the custom Picture Control is based is  
indicated by an icon in the top right corner  
of the edit display.  
Original  
Picture Control icon  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Use the Load/save option in the Manage Picture Control menu  
to copy custom Picture Controls to and from memory cards.  
Custom Picture Controls can be created on a computer using  
Picture Control Utility 2, a utility launched from ViewNX 2  
(supplied) or Capture NX-D, then saved to a memory card and  
copied to the camera. Custom Picture Controls created on the  
camera can be copied to a memory card for use in other D810s.  
Once the copies are no longer needed, they can be deleted  
using the Delete from card option.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or  
from the memory card, or to delete  
custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card, highlight Load/Save in  
the Manage Picture Control menu and  
press 2. The following options will be  
displayed:  
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory  
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera  
and name them as desired.  
Delete from card: Delete selected custom  
Picture Controls from the memory  
card. The confirmation dialog shown  
at right will be displayed before a  
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the  
selected Picture Control, highlight Yes  
and press J.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9)  
from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on  
the memory card.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at  
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created  
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the  
camera (0 170) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or  
deleted.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preserving Detail in Highlights and  
Shadows  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,  
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high  
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit  
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of  
shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used  
with matrix metering (0 114).  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting: YAuto  
D “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure  
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting  
option in the retouch menu (0 388) brightens shadows in images  
after shooting.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To use Active D-Lighting:  
1
Select Active D-Lighting.  
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
2
Choose an option.  
Highlight the desired option and  
press J. If YAuto is selected, the  
camera will automatically adjust  
Active D-Lighting according to  
shooting conditions (in exposure  
mode h, however, YAuto is  
equivalent to Q Normal).  
D Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting can not be used with movies. Noise (randomly-  
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken  
with Active D-Lighting. With some subjects, you may notice uneven  
shading, shadows around bright objects, or halos around dark objects.  
Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.  
A See Also  
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0 338), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a  
series of shots (0 143).  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
High Dynamic Range (HDR)  
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)  
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two  
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when  
used with matrix metering (0 114; with spot or center-weighted  
metering and a non-CPU lens, an exposure differential of Auto is  
equivalent to about 2 EV). It can not be used to record NEF  
(RAW) images. Movie recording (0 49), flash lighting,  
bracketing (0 133), multiple exposure (0 209), and time-lapse  
photography (0 223) can not be used while HDR is in effect and  
shutter speeds of A and & are not available.  
+
First exposure (darker)  
Second exposure  
(brighter)  
Combined HDR image  
1
Select HDR (high dynamic range).  
Highlight HDR (high dynamic  
range) in the shooting menu and  
press 2.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Select a mode.  
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.  
Highlight one of the following and  
press J.  
To take a series of HDR photographs,  
select 0 On (series). HDR  
shooting will continue until you  
select Off for HDR mode.  
To take one HDR photograph, select On  
(single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically  
after you have created a single HDR photograph.  
To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.  
If On (series) or On (single photo) is  
selected, a y icon will be displayed in  
the control panel.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Choose the exposure differential.  
To choose the difference in exposure  
between the two shots, highlight  
Exposure differential and press 2.  
The options shown at right will be  
displayed. Highlight an option and  
press J. Choose higher values for  
high-contrast subjects, but note that  
choosing a value higher than  
required may not produce the  
desired results; if Auto is selected, the  
camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.  
4
Choose the amount of smoothing.  
To choose how much the boundaries  
between the two images are  
smoothed, highlight Smoothing and  
press 2.  
The options shown at right will be  
displayed. Highlight an option and  
press J. Higher values produce a  
smoother composite image. Uneven  
shading may be visible with some  
subjects.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera takes two exposures  
when the shutter-release button is  
pressed all the way down. l y  
will flash in the control panel and  
l u in the viewfinder while  
the images are combined; no  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
photographs can be taken until  
recording is complete. Regardless  
of the option currently selected for  
release mode, only one photograph  
will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is  
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR  
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The y  
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.  
D Framing HDR Photographs  
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may  
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use  
of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may  
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark  
objects; this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of  
smoothing.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The D Button  
If HDR (high dynamic range) is selected  
for Custom Setting f8 (Assign BKT button;  
0 350), you can select the HDR mode by  
pressing the D button and rotating the  
main command dial and the exposure  
differential by pressing the D button and  
rotating the sub-command dial. The mode  
and exposure differential are shown in the  
control panel: y and F appear when On  
(series) is selected and y when On (single  
photo) is selected; no icon appears when  
HDR is off.  
A Interval Timer Photography  
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting  
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the  
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer  
shooting will end after a single shot).  
A Shooting Menu Banks  
HDR settings can be adjusted separately for each bank (0 291), but  
switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure  
(0 209) or interval timer shooting (0 216) disables HDR. HDR is also  
disabled if you switch to a bank in which an NEF (RAW) option is  
selected for image quality.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flash Photography  
Using the Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used not only when natural lighting is  
inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a  
catch light to the subject’s eyes.  
1
Choose a metering method (0 114).  
Select matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted  
metering to activate i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR.  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically  
when spot metering is selected.  
2
Press the flash pop-up button.  
The built-in flash will pop up and  
begin charging. When the flash is  
fully charged, the flash-ready  
indicator (c) will light.  
Flash pop-up button  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3
Choose a flash mode.  
Press the M (Y) button and rotate the main command dial  
until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control  
panel (0 191).  
M (Y) button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
4
5
Check exposure (shutter speed and aperture).  
Press the shutter-release button halfway and check shutter  
speed and aperture. The settings available when the built-in  
flash is raised are listed on page 193.  
The effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the Pv  
button to emit a modeling flash (0 338).  
Take the picture.  
Compose the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use,  
press it gently downward until the latch  
clicks into place.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Flash Modes  
The camera supports the following flash modes:  
Flash mode  
Description  
This mode is recommended for most situations. In  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,  
shutter speed will automatically be set to values  
between 1  
/
250 and 1  
/
60 s (1  
/
8000 to 1  
60 s when an optional  
/
Front-curtain  
sync  
flash unit is used with Auto FP High-Speed Sync;  
Red-eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one  
second before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes  
contract, reducing “red-eye” effect sometimes caused  
by flash. Owing to one-second shutter-release delay,  
this mode is not recommended with moving subjects  
or in other situations in which quick shutter response  
is required. Avoid moving camera while red-eye  
reduction lamp is lit.  
Red-eye  
reduction  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for  
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.  
Available only in programmed auto and aperture-  
priority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera  
shake.  
Red-eye  
reduction with  
slow sync  
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s  
to capture both subject and background at night or  
under dim light. This mode is only available in  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto  
exposure modes. Use of tripod is recommended to  
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Slow sync  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Flash mode  
Description  
In shutter-priority auto or manual  
exposure mode, flash fires just before the  
shutter closes. Use to create effect of a  
stream of light behind moving objects. In  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto, slow  
rear-curtain sync is used to capture both subject and  
background. Use of tripod is recommended to  
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Rear-curtain  
sync  
The flash does not fire.  
Flash off  
D The Built-in Flash  
See page 425 for information on the lenses that can be used with the  
built-in flash. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a  
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range  
of zoom lenses with a macro function.  
i-TTL flash control is available at ISO sensitivities between 64 and  
12800; at other sensitivities, the desired results may not be achieved at  
some ranges or aperture values.  
If the flash fires in continuous release modes (0 102), only one  
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it  
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used  
again after a short pause.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Flash Photography Shutter Speed and Aperture  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
See page  
Set automatically by camera  
e
1
(
/
250 s–1 60 s) 1, 2  
/
Setautomaticallyby  
camera  
Value selected by user  
f
g
h
1
(
/
250 s–30 s) 2  
Set automatically by camera  
1
(
/
250 s–1 60 s) 1, 2  
/
Value selected  
by user3  
Value selected by user  
1
(
/
250 s–30 s, A, &) 2  
1
2
Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and slow sync  
with red-eye reduction flash modes.  
Speeds as fast as 1  
8000 s are available with optional flash units that support auto FP high-  
/
speed sync (0 430) when 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected  
for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 329).  
3
Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. Consult table of flash ranges (0195)  
when setting aperture in g and h modes.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Flash Control Mode  
The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes:  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible  
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.  
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by  
RGB sensor with approximately 91K (91,000) pixels and are analyzed  
in combination with range information from matrix metering system  
to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and  
ambient background lighting. If type G, E, or D lens is used, distance  
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of  
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens  
data (focal length and maximum aperture; see 0 229). Not available  
when spot metering is used.  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting  
in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into  
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is  
emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated  
automatically when spot metering is selected.  
The flash control mode for the built-in flash can be selected using  
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 331). The  
information display shows the flash control mode for the built-in flash  
as follows:  
Flash sync  
i-TTL  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Commander mode  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A See Also  
See page 198 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered  
subject before recomposing a photograph.  
For information on auto FP high-speed sync and choosing a flash sync  
speed, see Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 329). For  
information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when  
using the flash, see Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed, 0 331).  
For information on flash control and using the built-in flash in  
commander mode, see Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in  
flash, 0 331).  
See page 428 for information on using optional flash units.  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Range  
64 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800  
m
ft  
1.6  
2.2 2.8  
3.2  
4.5 5.6  
1.4  
2
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
4
5.6  
8
5.6  
8
11  
8
11  
16  
22  
16 0.7–8.5 2ft 4in.–27ft 10in.  
11  
16  
22  
32  
22 0.6–6.0  
32 0.6–4.2  
2ft–19ft 8in.  
2ft–13ft 9in.  
2ft–9ft 10in.  
2ft–6ft 10in.  
2ft–4ft 11in.  
2ft–3ft 7in.  
2ft–2ft 7in.  
4
11 16  
32  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.8  
11 16 22  
6.3  
9
8
11 16 22 32  
11 16 22 32  
13 16 22 32  
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft).  
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is  
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
64  
2.5  
100  
2.8  
200  
3.5  
400  
4
800  
5
1600 3200 6400 12800  
5.6 7.1 10  
8
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the  
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to  
+1 EV in increments of 1  
3 EV, changing the brightness of the  
/
main subject relative to the background. Flash output can be  
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced  
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.  
To choose a value for flash compensation, press the M (Y)  
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value  
is displayed in the control panel. In general, choose positive  
values to make the main subject brighter, negative values to  
make it darker.  
M (Y) button  
Sub-command  
dial  
0 EV  
–0.3 (–1  
/3) EV  
+1.0 EV  
(M (Y) button pressed)  
At values other than 0.0, a Y icon will be displayed in the  
control panel and viewfinder after you release the M(Y) button.  
The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by  
pressing the M (Y) button.  
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash  
compensation to 0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when  
the camera is turned off.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Optional Flash Units  
The flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added  
to the flash compensation selected with the camera.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for  
flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step  
value, 0 315). For information on choosing how flash and exposure  
compensation combine, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for  
flash, 0 338). For information on automatically varying flash level  
over a series of shots, see page 133.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to  
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring  
that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the  
subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output  
is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and  
aperture.  
To use FV lock:  
1
Assign FV lock to a camera control.  
Select FV lock as the “press” option  
for Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn  
button, 0 343), f5 (Assign preview  
button, 0 349), or f6 (Assign AE-L/  
AF-L button, 0 349).  
2
Press the flash pop-up button.  
The built-in flash will pop up and  
begin charging.  
Flash pop-up button  
3
Focus.  
Position the subject in the  
center of the frame and  
press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Lock flash level.  
After confirming that the flash ready  
indicator (M) is displayed in the viewfinder, press the button  
selected in Step 1. The flash will emit a monitor preflash to  
determine the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be  
locked at this level and FV lock icon (e) will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
Recompose the photograph.  
6
7
Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without  
releasing FV lock.  
Release FV lock.  
Press the button selected in Step 1 to release FV lock.  
Confirm that the FV lock icon (e) is no longer displayed in the  
viewfinder.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash  
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for  
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 331).  
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units  
FV lock is also available with optional flash units in TTL and (where  
supported) monitor pre-flash AA and monitor pre-flash A flash control  
modes. Note that when commander mode is selected for Custom  
Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 331), you will need to set  
the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to  
TTL or AA.  
A Metering  
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as  
follows:  
Flash unit  
Flash mode  
i-TTL  
Metered area  
6-mm circle in center of frame  
Area metered by flash  
exposure meter  
Stand-alone flash unit  
AA  
i-TTL  
AA  
A (master  
flash)  
Entire frame  
Used with other flash  
units (Advanced  
Wireless Lighting)  
Area metered by flash  
exposure meter  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Shooting Options  
The R Button (Viewfinder Photography)  
Pressing the R button during viewfinder photography displays  
shooting information in the monitor including shutter speed,  
aperture, number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode.  
1 Exposure mode ...........................116 6 Aperture (f-number)......... 120, 121  
Aperture (number of  
2 Flexible program indicator.......118  
stops)................................... 120, 424  
Bracketing increment....... 135, 140  
Number of shots in ADL  
bracketing sequence................ 143  
Maximum aperture  
(non-CPU lenses)....................... 232  
7 Color temperature  
3 Flash sync indicator....................329  
4 Shutter speed .....................119, 121  
White balance fine-tuning .......151  
Color temperature.............148, 155  
Number of shots in exposure  
and flash bracketing  
sequence .....................................134  
Number of shots in  
WB bracketing sequence.........139  
Number of shots in multiple  
exposure ......................................211  
Focal length (non-CPU  
indicator .................... 148, 155, 157  
8 Image area indicator.................... 74  
9 Release mode indicator ............ 102  
Continuous shooting speed..... 104  
10 Focus points indicator................. 94  
lenses) ..........................................232  
AF-area mode indicator .............. 90  
5 Aperture stop indicator....120, 424  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11 Shutter-speed lock icon............ 126 19 Camera battery indicator ............19  
12 Electronic front-curtain shutter  
20 MB-D12 battery type  
indicator ...................................... 323  
13 Exposure delay mode  
display.......................................... 327  
MB-D12 battery indicator......... 328  
indicator ...................................... 322 21 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures) .....................................20  
22 Number of exposures  
remaining..............................20, 489  
Manual lens number ................. 232  
Time-lapse recording  
indicator ............................. 223, 227  
23 ISO sensitivity indicator ........... 109  
Auto ISO sensitivity  
14 FV lock indicator ......................... 199  
15 Aperture lock icon...................... 127  
HDR (series) indicator................ 188  
Multiple exposure (series)  
indicator ...................................... 211  
16 Flash compensation  
indicator ...................................... 196  
Flash compensation value........ 196  
17 Exposure compensation  
indicator ...................................... 130  
Exposure compensation  
value............................................. 130  
18 Exposure and flash  
indicator ...................................... 111  
24 White balance ............................. 148  
White balance fine-tuning  
indicator ...................................... 152  
25 Eye-Fi connection indicator..... 382  
bracketing indicator ................. 134  
WB bracketing indicator ........... 139 26 Autofocus mode indicator ..........87  
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 143  
ADL bracketing amount ........... 144  
HDR indicator .............................. 185  
HDR exposure differential ........ 188  
Multiple exposure indicator..... 210  
27 Flash mode .................................. 191  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
28 Interval timer indicator ....216, 219 33 T indicator .................................. 466  
Time-lapse indicator .........223, 227  
34 Image comment indicator........ 375  
29 Metering .......................................114  
35 Copyright information  
30 Image size (JPEG and  
indicator ...................................... 376  
TIFF images).................................. 83  
31 Image quality................................. 79  
Secondary slot function.............. 86  
36 Satellite signal indicator ........... 233  
37 “Beep” indicator.......................... 321  
38 Picture Control indicator........... 172  
39 Vignette control indicator ........ 297  
32 Small image size indicator  
(NEF/RAW images) ...................... 85  
A The T Indicator  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power  
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is  
installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector  
and AC adapter (0 436). Two days of charging will power the clock for  
about three months. If the T icon flashes in the information display,  
the clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with any new  
photographs will not be correct. Set the clock to the correct time and  
date using the Time zone and date > Date and time option in the  
setup menu (0 18).  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 Active D-Lighting indicator......183 48 Pv button assignment .............. 349  
41 High ISO noise reduction  
49 Color space indicator................. 296  
indicator.......................................299  
50 Exposure indicator ..................... 122  
Exposure compensation  
42 Shooting menu bank.................291  
indicator ...................................... 130  
Bracketing progress indicator:  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing........................... 134  
WB bracketing....................... 139  
ADL bracketing ..................... 143  
43 Custom settings bank................304  
44 Long exposure noise reduction  
indicator.......................................299  
45 D button assignment............350  
46 AE-L/AF-L button assignment....349  
47 Fn button assignment................343  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button  
again or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will  
turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10  
seconds.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see  
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 320). For information on  
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see  
Custom Setting d10 (Information display, 0 326).  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The b button  
Press the b button for quick access to  
the following settings during viewfinder  
photography. Highlight items using the  
multi selector and press J to view  
options for the highlighted item. Press  
the b button again to resume shooting.  
b button  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
High ISO NR  
Active D-Lighting  
Color space  
Assign preview button  
Option  
Assign Fn button  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
Assign BKT button  
Long exposure NR  
0
0
Custom settings bank  
A Tool Tips  
A tool tip giving the name of the selected  
item appears in the information display.  
Tool tips can be turned off using Custom  
Setting d9 (Screen tips; 0 325).  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default  
Settings  
The camera settings listed  
below can be restored to  
default values by holding the  
T and E buttons down  
together for more than two  
seconds (these buttons are  
marked by a green dot). The  
E button  
control panel turns off briefly  
while settings are reset.  
T button  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu  
Option  
Image quality  
Default  
JPEG normal  
JPEG/TIFF recording  
Image size  
Large  
NEF (RAW) recording  
Image size  
White balance  
Large  
Auto > Normal  
A-B: 0, G-M: 0  
Unmodified  
Off3  
Fine-tuning  
Picture Control settings 2  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
ISO sensitivity settings  
ISO sensitivity  
100  
Off  
Off 4  
Off 5  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
Multiple exposure  
Interval timer shooting  
1
With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings and Picture Control  
parameters, only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu  
bank option will be reset (0 291). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.  
Current Picture Control only.  
2
3
4
Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.  
If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be  
created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and number of shots are not reset.  
If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting time, shooting  
interval, number of intervals and shots, and exposure smoothing are not reset.  
5
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Other Settings  
Option  
Default  
Center  
Focus point 1  
Preset focus point  
Exposure mode  
Flexible program  
Exposure compensation  
AE lock hold  
Center  
Programmed auto  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Aperture lock  
Off  
Shutter speed lock  
Autofocus mode  
AF-area mode  
Off  
AF-S  
Viewfinder  
Single-point AF  
Live view photography/movie live view  
Photo live view display WB  
Highlight display  
Headphone volume  
Metering  
Normal-area AF  
None  
Off  
15  
Matrix  
Off2  
Bracketing  
Flash mode  
Front-curtain sync  
Flash compensation  
FV lock  
Exposure delay mode  
+ NEF (RAW)  
Off  
Off  
Off 3  
Off  
1
2
Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.  
Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV (exposure/flash  
bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is selected for the second shot of  
two-shot ADL bracketing programs.  
3
Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option  
will be reset (0 304). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.  
A See Also  
See page 272 for a list of default settings.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiple Exposure  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures  
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can make use of  
RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors  
noticeably superior to those in software-generated  
photographic overlays.  
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live  
view before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting  
will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically  
if no operations are performed for 30 s.  
1
Select Multiple exposure.  
Highlight Multiple exposure in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the  
meter-off delay using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319). The  
maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option  
selected for Custom Setting c2. If the monitor turns off during  
playback or menu operations and no operations are performed for 30 s  
after the standby timer has expired, shooting will end and a multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded  
to that point.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Select a mode.  
Highlight Multiple exposure mode  
and press 2.  
Highlight one of the following and  
press J:  
To take a series of multiple exposures,  
select 0 On (series). Multiple  
exposure shooting will continue  
until you select Off for Multiple  
exposure mode.  
To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo). Normal  
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a  
single multiple exposure.  
To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.  
If On (series) or On (single photo) is  
selected, a n icon will be displayed in  
the control panel.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Choose the number of shots.  
Highlight Number of shots and  
press 2.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number  
of exposures that will be combined  
to form a single photograph and  
press J.  
A The D Button  
If Multiple exposure is selected for  
Custom Setting f8 (Assign BKT button;  
0 350), you can select the multiple  
exposure mode by pressing the D  
button and rotating the main command  
dial and the number of shots by  
pressing the D button and rotating  
the sub-command dial. The mode and  
number of shots are shown in the  
control panel: n and F appear when  
On (series) is selected and n when On  
(single photo) is selected; no icon  
appears when multiple exposure is off.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
Choose the amount of gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.  
The following options will be  
displayed. Highlight an option and  
press J.  
On: Gain is adjusted according to  
number of exposures actually  
recorded (gain for each exposure is  
set to 1  
/
2 for 2 exposures, 1  
3 for  
/
3 exposures, etc.).  
Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.  
Note that photographs may be affected by noise (randomly-  
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines).  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In continuous release modes (0 102), the camera  
records all exposures in a single burst. If On  
(series) is selected, the camera will continue to  
record multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is  
pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure  
shooting will end after the first photograph. In self-timer  
mode, the camera will automatically record the number of  
exposures selected in Step 3 on page 211, regardless of the  
option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) >  
Number of shots (0 319); the interval between shots is  
however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) >  
Interval between shots. In other release modes, one  
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release  
button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have  
been recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple  
exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page 214).  
The n icon will flash until shooting  
ends. If On (series) is selected,  
multiple exposure shooting will only  
end when Off is selected for multiple  
exposure mode; if On (single photo)  
is selected, multiple exposure shooting ends automatically  
when the multiple exposure is complete. The n icon clears  
from the display when multiple exposure shooting ends.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
To interrupt a multiple exposure before  
the specified number of exposures have  
been taken, select Off for multiple  
exposure mode. If shooting ends before  
the specified number of exposures have  
been taken, a multiple exposure will be  
created from the exposures that have  
been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be  
adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.  
Note that shooting will end automatically if:  
A two-button reset is performed (0 206)  
The camera is turned off  
The battery is exhausted  
Pictures are deleted  
D Multiple Exposure  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple  
exposure.  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Taking  
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.  
The shooting information listed in the playback photo information  
display (including metering, exposure, exposure mode, focal length,  
date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the  
multiple exposure.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Interval Timer Photography  
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is  
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until  
the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu  
have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer  
shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a  
single photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single  
photo) is selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure  
shooting will also end automatically).  
A Other Settings  
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be  
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be  
changed.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at  
preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval  
timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at  
current settings and view the results in the monitor. Once settings  
have been adjusted to your satisfaction, close the viewfinder eyepiece  
shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with  
photographs and exposure (0 106).  
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the  
setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct  
time and date (0 18).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before  
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure  
the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery  
before use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available  
separately).  
1
Select Interval timer shooting.  
Highlight Interval timer shooting in  
the shooting menu and press 2 to  
display interval timer settings.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Adjust interval timer settings.  
Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval,  
and exposure smoothing option.  
To choose a start option:  
Highlight Start options and  
Highlight an option and press J.  
press 2.  
To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a  
chosen date and time, select Choose start day and start time,  
then choose the date and time and press J.  
To choose the interval between shots:  
Highlight Interval and press 2.  
Choose an interval (hours,  
minutes, and seconds) and  
press J.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To choose the number of shots per interval:  
Highlight No. of intervals ×  
Choose the number of intervals  
shots/interval and press 2.  
and the number of shots per  
interval and press J.  
In S (single frame) mode, the photographs for each interval will be  
taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 (CL mode shooting  
speed, 0 321).  
To enable or disable exposure smoothing:  
Highlight Exposure smoothing  
Highlight an option and press J.  
and press 2.  
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match the  
previous shot in e, f, and g modes (note that exposure smoothing  
only takes effect in mode h if auto ISO sensitivity control is on).  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Start shooting.  
Highlight Start and press J. The first  
series of shots will be taken at the  
specified starting time, or after about  
3 s if Now was selected for Start  
options in Step 2. Shooting will  
continue at the selected interval until  
all shots have been taken.  
J button  
A During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the Q  
icon will flash in the control panel.  
Immediately before the next shooting  
interval begins, the shutter speed display  
will show the number of intervals  
remaining, and the aperture display will  
show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At other  
times, the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in  
each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button  
halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture  
will be displayed until the standby timer expires).  
Pictures can be played back while interval timer photography is in  
progress. The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds  
before each interval. Note that changing camera settings while the  
interval timer is active may cause shooting to end.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by  
pressing J or selecting Pause in the interval timer menu.  
❚❚ Resuming Interval Timer Shooting  
To resume shooting:  
Starting Now  
Highlight Restart and  
press J.  
Starting at a Specified Time  
For Start options,  
Choose a starting date Highlight Restart and  
highlightChoosestart and time and press J.  
day and start time  
press J.  
and press 2.  
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting  
To end interval timer photography and resume normal shooting  
before all the photos are taken, select Off in the interval timer  
menu.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ No Photograph  
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following  
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was  
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous  
interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or single-  
servo autofocus is in effect and the camera is unable to focus  
(note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting  
will resume with the next interval.  
D Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no  
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 220) after deleting some  
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.  
A Interval Timer Photography  
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected  
number of shots. If the interval is too short, the number of photos  
taken may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of  
intervals multiplied by the number of shots per interval). Interval timer  
photography can not be combined with long time-exposures (bulb or  
time photography, 0 123) or live view or time-lapse photography  
(0 35, 223) and is not available in movie live view (0 49) or when  
Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter  
button, 0 364). Note that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and  
time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the next,  
the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the  
next may vary. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for  
example, if a shutter speed of A or & is currently selected in  
manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute), a  
warning will be displayed in the monitor.  
Interval timer shooting will pause when E (self-timer) mode is  
selected or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when the  
camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without  
ending interval timer photography). Pausing shooting does not affect  
interval timer settings.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.  
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer  
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in  
the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of  
shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing  
is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will  
take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of  
copies specified in the bracketing program.  
A Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks  
(0 291); changing the shooting menu bank does not interrupt interval  
timer photography. If shooting menu settings are reset using the  
Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu (0 292), interval  
timer shooting will end and interval timer settings will be reset as  
follows:  
Start options: Now  
Interval: 00:01':00"  
Number of intervals: 1  
Number of shots: 1  
Exposure smoothing: Off  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time-Lapse Photography  
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to  
create a silent time-lapse movie using the options currently  
selected for Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality, and  
Destination in the movie settings menu (0 62). For information  
on the image area used for time-lapse movies, see page 59.  
A Before Shooting  
Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current  
settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure  
preview) and view the results in the monitor. For consistent coloration,  
choose a white balance setting other than auto (0 148). Once settings  
have been adjusted to your satisfaction, close the viewfinder eyepiece  
shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with  
photographs and exposure (0 106).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before  
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an  
optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery.  
1
Select Time-lapse photography.  
Highlight Time-lapse photography  
in the shooting menu and press 2 to  
display time-lapse photography  
settings.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Adjust time-lapse photography settings.  
Choose an interval, total shooting time, and exposure  
smoothing option.  
To choose the interval between frames:  
Highlight Interval and press 2.  
Choose an interval longer than  
the slowest anticipated shutter  
speed (minutes and seconds) and  
press J.  
To choose the total shooting time:  
Highlight Shooting time and  
Choose shooting time (up to  
press 2.  
7 hours 59 minutes) and press J.  
To enable or disable exposure smoothing:  
Highlight Exposure smoothing  
Highlight an option and press J.  
and press 2.  
Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in e, f, and g  
modes (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode h  
if auto ISO sensitivity control is on).  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Start shooting.  
Highlight Start and press J. Time-  
lapse photography starts after about  
3 s. The camera takes photographs at  
the selected interval for the selected  
shooting time.  
J button  
When complete, time-lapse movies  
are recorded to the memory card  
selected for Movie settings >  
Destination (0 63).  
❚❚ Ending Time-Lapse Photography  
To end time-lapse photography before all the photos are taken,  
highlight Off in the time-lapse photography menu and press J,  
or press J between frames or immediately after a frame is  
recorded. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the  
point where time-lapse photography ended. Note that time-  
lapse photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the  
power source is removed or disconnected or the destination  
memory card is ejected.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ No Photograph  
The camera will skip the current frame if single-servo autofocus  
is in effect and the camera is unable to focus (note that the  
camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume  
with the next frame.  
D Time-Lapse Photography  
Time-lapse is not available in live view (0 35, 49), at a shutter speed of  
A or & (0 123), when bracketing (0 133), High Dynamic Range  
(HDR, 0 184), multiple exposure (0 209), or interval timer  
photography (0 216) is active. Note that because shutter speed and  
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary  
from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the  
start of the next shot may vary. Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse  
movie can not be recorded at current settings (for example, if the  
memory card is full, the interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval  
is longer than the shooting time).  
Time-lapse photography may end if camera controls are used or  
settings are changed or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be  
created from the frames shot to the point where time-lapse  
photography ended.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Calculating the Length of the Final Movie  
The total number of frames in the final  
movie can be approximated by dividing the  
shooting time by the interval and rounding  
up. The length of the final movie can then  
be calculated by dividing the number of  
shots by the frame rate selected for Movie  
settings > Frame size/frame rate. A  
48 frame movie recorded at 1920×1080;  
24p, for example, will be about two  
seconds long. The maximum length for  
movies recorded using time-lapse  
Length recorded/  
maximum length  
Memory card  
indicator  
photography is 20 minutes.  
Frame size/frame rate  
A During Shooting  
During time-lapse photography, a Q icon  
will flash and the time-lapse recording  
indicator will be displayed in the control  
panel. The time remaining (in hours and  
minutes) appears in the shutter-speed  
display immediately before each frame is  
recorded. At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by  
pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Regardless of the option  
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319), the standby  
timer will not expire during shooting.  
To view current time-lapse photography  
settings or end time-lapse photography  
(0 220), press the G button between  
shots.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Image Review  
The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse  
photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for  
a few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the  
playback menu (0 287). Other playback operations can not be  
performed while the frame is displayed.  
A Release Mode  
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot  
at each interval. The self-timer can not be used.  
A See Also  
For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse  
photography is complete, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 321).  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lenses can be used in exposure modes g and h, with  
aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data  
(lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain  
access to the following CPU lens functions.  
If the focal length of the lens is known:  
Power zoom can be used with optional flash units  
Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback  
photo info display  
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and  
viewfinder  
Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit  
supports AA (auto aperture) mode  
Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info  
display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:  
Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to  
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate  
results with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)  
Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering  
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To  
enter or edit data for a non-CPU lens:  
1
2
3
4
Select Non-CPU lens data.  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the  
setup menu and press 2.  
Choose a lens number.  
Highlight Lens number and press 4  
or 2 to choose a lens number.  
Enter the focal length and aperture.  
Highlight Focal length (mm) or  
Maximum aperture and press 4 or  
2 to edit the highlighted item.  
Save settings and exit.  
Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be  
stored under the chosen lens number.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater  
than the actual focal length of the lens.  
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses  
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum  
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not  
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for  
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the  
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal  
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:  
1
Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control.  
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press +  
command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom  
Settings menu (0 348). Non-CPU lens number selection can  
be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn  
button, 0 343), the Pv button (Custom Setting f5, Assign  
preview button, 0 349), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom  
Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 349).  
2
Use the selected control to choose a lens number.  
Press the selected button and rotate the main or sub-  
command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in  
the control panel.  
Maximum  
Focal length  
aperture  
Fn button Main command  
Lens number  
dial  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Location Data  
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,  
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated  
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each  
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional  
GP-1 and GP-1A GPS units (see below; note that these units do  
not provide the compass heading), or with compatible third-  
party units connected via an optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord  
❚❚ GP-1/GP-1A GPS Units  
These optional GPS units are designed  
for use with Nikon digital cameras. For  
information on connecting the unit, see  
the manual provided with the device.  
A The o Icon  
Connection status is shown by the o icon:  
o (static): The camera has established  
communication with the GPS device.  
Photo information for pictures taken while  
this icon is displayed includes an  
additional page of location data (0 246).  
o (flashing): The location device is  
searching for a signal. Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not  
include location data.  
No icon: No new location data have been received from the GPS device  
for at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the o icon is not  
displayed do not include location data.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
❚❚ Setup Menu Options  
The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options  
listed below.  
Standby timer: Choose whether or not the exposure meters  
will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no  
operations are performed for the period specified in  
Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319; to allow the  
camera time to acquire location data when a GP-1 or  
GP-1A is connected, the delay is extended by up to one  
minute after exposure meters are activated or the camera  
is turned on). This reduces the drain on the battery.  
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is  
connected.  
Enable  
Disable  
Position: This item is only available if a GPS device is  
connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude,  
altitude, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if  
supported) as reported by the GPS device.  
Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera  
clock with the time reported by the GPS device.  
A Heading  
The heading is only recorded if the GPS  
device is equipped with a digital compass  
(note that the GP-1 and GP-1A are not  
equipped with a compass). Keep the GPS  
device pointing in the same direction as the  
lens and at least 20cm (8 in.) from the  
camera.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the  
camera clock.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
More About Playback  
Viewing Images  
W
W
W
X
X
X
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K  
button. The most recent photograph  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
Additional pictures can be displayed by  
pressing 4 or 2; to view additional  
information on the current photograph,  
press 1 or 3 (0 238).  
K button  
Thumbnail Playback  
To view multiple images, press the W  
button when a picture is displayed full  
frame. The number of images displayed  
increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the  
W button is pressed, and decreases  
with each press of the X button. Use the  
multi selector to highlight images and  
press the center of the multi selector to  
view the highlighted image full frame.  
W button  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
A Rotate Tall  
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)  
photographs in tall orientation, select On  
for the Rotate tall option in the playback  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 287),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting  
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are  
not rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release  
modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph  
in the current series displayed.  
A Retouch and Editing  
To create a retouched or edited copy of the photo or movie currently  
displayed in full-frame playback, press the b button and choose an  
option.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Two Memory Cards  
If two memory cards are inserted, you can  
select a memory card for playback by  
pressing the W button when 72  
thumbnails are displayed. The dialog  
shown at right will be displayed; highlight  
the desired slot and press 2 to display a list  
of folders, then highlight a folder and press  
J to view the pictures in the selected folder.  
A Resuming Shooting  
To turn the monitor off and return to shooting mode, press K or press  
the shutter-release button halfway. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on  
when no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor  
off delay, 0 320). For information on choosing the role played by the  
center of the multi selector, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector  
center button, 0 341). For information on using the command dials  
for image or menu navigation, see Custom Setting f9 (Customize  
command dials) > Menus and playback (0 352).  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-  
frame playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo  
information as shown below. Note that “image only, shooting  
data, RGB histograms, and highlights are only displayed if  
corresponding option is selected for Playback display options  
(0 282). Location data are only displayed if a GPS device was  
used when the photo was taken (0 233).  
File information  
None (image only)  
Overview data  
Highlights  
Location data  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ File Information  
1 Protect status............................... 250 7 Image size .......................................83  
2 Retouch indicator....................... 384 8 Image area ......................................74  
3 Focus point 1, 2 .................................94 9 Time of recording..........................18  
4 AF area brackets1...........................17 10 Date of recording ..........................18  
5 Frame number/total number of  
frames  
11 Current card slot ............................20  
12 Folder name................................. 293  
13 File name...................................... 295  
6 Image quality .................................79  
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 282).  
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S, display shows point where focus first locked. If photograph was  
taken using AF-C, focus point is only displayed if option other than auto-area AF was selected for  
AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Highlights  
1 Image highlights *  
3 Current channel *  
2 Folder number–frame number  
.......................................................293  
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button  
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as  
follows:  
W button  
RGB  
R
(all channels)  
(red)  
B
G
(blue)  
(green)  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ RGB Histogram  
1 Image highlights *  
4 Current channel *  
2 Folder number–frame number  
....................................................... 293  
3 White balance ............................. 148  
Color temperature ............... 155  
White balance fine-tuning  
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all  
histograms, horizontal axis gives  
pixel brightness, vertical axis  
number of pixels.  
6 Histogram (red channel)  
7 Histogram (green channel)  
8 Histogram (blue channel)  
............................................... 151  
Preset manual ....................... 158  
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button  
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as  
follows:  
W button  
RGB  
R
(all channels)  
(red)  
Highlight  
display off  
B
G
(blue)  
(green)  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the  
histogram is displayed, press  
X
. Use the  
X
and buttons to zoom in and out and  
W
scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the  
data for the portion of the image visible in  
the monitor.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from  
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are  
shown below:  
If the image contains objects  
with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution  
of tones will be relatively even.  
If the image is dark, tone  
distribution will be shifted to  
the left.  
If the image is bright, tone  
distribution will be shifted to  
the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to  
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the  
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall  
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see  
photographs in the monitor.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Shooting Data  
1 Metering ....................................... 114 7 Flash type............................ 189, 428  
Electronic front-curtain  
Commander mode..................... 334  
shutter.......................................... 323  
Shutter speed ..................... 119, 121  
Aperture............................... 120, 121  
8 Flash mode .................................. 191  
9 Flash control ................................ 331  
Flash compensation .................. 196  
10 Camera name  
11 Image area ......................................74  
12 Folder number–frame  
2 Exposure mode ........................... 116  
ISO sensitivity 1 ............................ 109  
3 Exposure compensation ........... 130  
Optimal exposure tuning 2 ....... 318  
number........................................ 293  
4 Focal length ........................ 229, 427  
5 Lens data ...................................... 229  
6 Focus mode.....................................87  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13 White balance..............................148 14 Color space................................... 296  
15 Picture Control 4 .......................... 170  
Color temperature................155  
White balance fine-tuning  
...............................................151  
Preset manual........................158  
16 High ISO noise reduction..........299 19 Vignette control.......................... 297  
Long exposure noise reduction  
.......................................................299  
17 Active D-Lighting........................182  
20 Retouch history........................... 384  
21 Image comment ......................... 375  
18 HDR exposure differential ........186  
HDR smoothing...........................186  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
22 Name of photographer5 ........... 376 23 Copyright holder 5 ...................... 376  
1
2
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
Displayed if Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 318) has been set  
to a value other than zero for any metering method.  
3
4
5
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.  
The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded  
with the photograph as described on page 376.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
❚❚ Location Data (0 233)  
1 Latitude  
2 Longitude  
3 Altitude  
4 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
5 Heading 2  
1
2
Data for movies are for start of recording.  
Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Overview  
1 Frame number/total number of  
frames  
2 Protect status............................... 250  
3 Retouch indicator....................... 384  
4 Multiple exposure ...................... 209  
17 Metering....................................... 114  
18 Exposure mode........................... 116  
19 Shutter speed..................... 119, 121  
20 Flash compensation .................. 196  
Commander mode..................... 334  
5 Location data indicator............. 233 21 Aperture .............................. 120, 121  
6 Camera name  
22 ISO sensitivity* ............................ 109  
7 Image comment indicator ....... 375 23 Flash mode .................................. 191  
8 Histogram showing the  
distribution of tones in the image  
24 Focal length........................ 229, 427  
25 Active D-Lighting ...................... 182  
26 Picture Control ............................ 170  
27 Color space .................................. 296  
28 White balance ............................. 148  
Color temperature ............... 155  
White balance fine-tuning  
9 Image quality .................................79  
10 Image size........................................83  
11 Image area ......................................74  
12 File name ...................................... 295  
13 Time of recording ..........................18  
14 Folder name................................. 293  
15 Date of recording...........................18  
16 Current card slot ............................20  
............................................... 151  
Preset manual ....................... 158  
29 Exposure compensation........... 130  
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the  
image displayed in full-frame playback.  
The following operations can be  
performed while zoom is in effect:  
X button  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to  
zoom 36 × 24  
(3 : 2) format  
images in to  
maximum of  
approximately  
46× (large  
Zoom in or  
out  
X / W  
images), 34× (medium images) or 22×  
(small images). Press W to zoom out.  
While photo is zoomed in, use multi  
selector to view areas of image not visible  
in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed  
to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.  
Navigation window is displayed when  
zoom ratio is altered; area currently  
visible in monitor is indicated by yellow  
border. Bar under navigation window  
shows zoom ratio; turns green at ratio of  
1 : 1.  
View other  
areas of  
image  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To  
Use  
Description  
Faces (up to 35)  
detected  
during zoom  
are indicated  
by white  
Select faces  
borders in  
navigation  
window. Rotate sub-command dial to  
view other faces.  
Rotate main command dial to view same  
location in other images at current zoom  
ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a  
movie is displayed.  
View other  
images  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
Press the shutter-release button halfway  
/ K or press the K button to exit to shooting  
mode.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, press the  
L (Z/Q) button to protect the current picture from accidental  
deletion. Protected files are marked with a P icon and can not  
be deleted using the O (Q) button or the Delete option in the  
playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted  
when the memory card is formatted (0 366). To remove  
protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or  
highlight it and press the L (Z/Q) button.  
L (Z/Q) button  
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently  
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (Z/Q) and O (Q)  
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O (Q) button. To  
delete multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the  
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback  
menu. Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note  
that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback  
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.  
1
Press the O (Q) button.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed.  
O (Q) button  
2
Press the O (Q) button again.  
To delete the photograph, press the  
O (Q) button. To exit without  
deleting the photograph, press the  
K button.  
O (Q) button  
A See Also  
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether  
the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is  
deleted (0 287).  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following  
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some  
time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Description  
Selected Delete selected pictures.  
Q
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for  
All  
playback (0 281). If two cards are inserted, you can  
R
select the card from which pictures will be deleted.  
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1
2
Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a  
picture and press the center of the  
multi selector to select or deselect.  
Selected pictures are marked by a O  
icon. Repeat as desired to select  
additional pictures.  
Delete the selected pictures.  
Press J. A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed; highlight Yes and press  
J.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2  
Install the supplied software to display and edit photographs  
and movies that have been copied to your computer. Before  
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your computer meets the  
system requirements on page 255. Be sure to use the latest  
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for download from the  
websites listed on page xxii, as earlier versions that do not  
support the D810 may fail to transfer NEF (RAW) images  
correctly.  
1
Launch the installer.  
Start the computer, insert the installer CD, and launch the  
installer. A language selection dialog will be displayed. If the  
desired language is not available, click Region Selection to  
choose a different region (region selection is not available in  
the European release).  
q Select region (if required)  
w Select language  
e Click Next  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Start the installer.  
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Click Install  
3
4
Exit the installer.  
Windows  
Mac  
Click Yes  
Click OK  
Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.  
A Viewing the Nikon Website  
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All  
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet  
connection required).  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A System Requirements  
Windows  
Photos: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4, or Core series, 1.6 GHz  
or better  
Movies (playback): Pentium D 3.0 GHz or better; Intel Core  
i5 or better recommended when viewing movies with  
a frame size of 1280 × 720 or more at a frame rate of  
30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of  
1920 × 1080 or more  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better  
Pre-installed versions of Windows 8.1, Windows 7, and  
Windows Vista  
CPU  
OS *  
32-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or Windows Vista: 1 GB or more  
(2 GB or more recommended)  
64-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or Windows Vista: 2 GB or more  
(4 GB or more recommended)  
Memory  
(RAM)  
Hard disk A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or  
space  
more recommended)  
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024  
pixels or more recommended)  
Graphics  
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more  
Built-in USB port required. Software may not function as  
expected if camera is connected via USB hub.  
Interface  
* See the websites listed on page xxii for the latest information on supported operating  
systems.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mac  
Photos: Intel Core or Xeon series  
Movies (playback): Core Duo 2 GHz or better; Intel Core i5  
or better recommended when viewing movies with a  
frame size of 1280 × 720 or more at a frame rate of  
30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of  
1920 × 1080 or more  
CPU  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better  
OS X 10.9, 10.8, or 10.7  
OS *  
Memory  
(RAM)  
2 GB or more (4 GB or more recommended)  
Hard disk A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or  
space  
more recommended)  
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024  
pixels or more recommended)  
Graphics  
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more  
Built-in USB port required. Software may not function as  
expected if camera is connected via USB hub.  
Interface  
* See the websites listed on page xxii for the latest information on supported operating  
systems.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using ViewNX 2  
Copy Pictures to the Computer  
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on  
the supplied ViewNX 2 CD (0 253).  
1
Connect the USB cable.  
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory  
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown  
and then turn the camera on.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera  
battery is fully charged.  
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting  
interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the  
connectors at an angle.  
D During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while  
transfer is in progress.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A The USB Cable Clip  
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the supplied clip  
as shown.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the  
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
2
Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.  
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a  
program, select Nikon Transfer 2.  
A Windows 7  
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as  
described below.  
1 Under Import pictures and videos,  
click Change program. A program  
selection dialog will be displayed;  
select Import File using  
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.  
2 Double-click Import File.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Windows 8.1  
Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay  
prompt when the camera is connected.  
Tap or click the dialog and then tap or  
click Import File/Nikon Transfer 2 to  
select Nikon Transfer 2.  
3
4
Click Start Transfer.  
At default settings, pictures on the memory card will be  
copied to the computer.  
Start Transfer  
Terminate the connection.  
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually  
Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.  
Mac: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.  
A For More Information  
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.  
A Capture NX-D  
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to retouch photos or to change  
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.  
Capture NX-D also offers an Image Dust Off feature that removes  
image artifacts caused by dust inside the camera. Capture NX-D is  
available for download from a link in the ViewNX 2 installer (0 253).  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet and Wireless Networks  
The optional UT-1 communication unit (0 437) can be used to  
upload photographs to a computer or ftp server. The camera  
connects to the UT-1 using the USB cable supplied with the  
camera, while the UT-1 in turn connects to the network via an  
Ethernet cable or an optional WT-5 wireless transmitter (0 437).  
The optional communication units and wireless transmitters  
support the following modes:  
Mode  
FTP upload  
Image  
Function  
Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp  
server, or upload new photos as they are taken.  
transfer  
Control the camera using optional Camera Control Pro 2  
software and save new photos and movies directly to  
the computer.  
Camera  
control  
View and take pictures remotely using a browser  
equipped computer or iPhone.  
HTTP server  
For information on using optional communication units or  
wireless transmitters, refer to the manuals provided with the  
device. Be sure to update to the latest versions of the device  
firmware and related software.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D During Transfer  
Movies can not be recorded or played back when the UT-1 is  
connected and there are either images remaining to be sent or images  
currently being transferred via an Ethernet or wireless network.  
A Movies  
Movies can be uploaded over Ethernet and wireless networks in  
transfer mode. Note, however, that movies can not be uploaded using  
the Auto send or Send folder features in the Options menu.  
D HTTP Server Mode  
The camera can not be used to record or view movies in HTTP server  
mode.  
A WT-5 Wireless Transmitters  
The principal differences between the WT-5 and WT-5A/B/C/D/E is in  
the number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all  
references to the the WT-5 also apply to the WT-5A/B/C/D/E.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Photographs  
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer  
(0 485) connected directly to the camera.  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen  
will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge  
playback display.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable  
via a USB hub.  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)  
(0 79) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 399).  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional AC adapter and  
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct  
USB connection, set Color space to sRGB (0 296).  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1
Display the desired picture.  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button  
to zoom in on the current frame (press the center of the multi  
selector to exit zoom). To view thumbnails, press the center  
of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to  
display the highlighted picture full frame. To view images in  
other locations, press W when thumbnails are displayed and  
select the desired card and folder as described on page 237.  
A See Also  
See page 472 for information on what to do if an error occurs during  
printing.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Adjust printing options.  
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to  
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options  
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default  
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,  
press J to return to the printer settings menu.  
Option  
Description  
Page size Choose a page size.  
This option is listed only when pictures are printed one  
No. of copies at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies  
(maximum 99).  
Border  
Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.  
Choose whether to print the times and dates of  
recordings on photos.  
Time stamp  
This option is listed only when pictures are printed one  
at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No  
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,  
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog  
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the  
crop, W to decrease, and use the multi selector to  
position the crop. Note that print quality may drop if  
small crops are printed at large sizes.  
Cropping  
3
Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been printed, press J.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1
2
Display the PictBridge menu.  
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.  
Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures for printing. Use the multi  
selector to highlight pictures (to view images in other  
locations, press W and select the desired card and folder as  
described on page 237; to display the current picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button) and, keeping the  
L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1 or 3 to choose the  
number of prints (maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set  
the number of prints to zero.  
Print (DPOF): Print the current DPOF print order (0 267).  
The order can be viewed and modified before printing as  
described in the description for Print select, above.  
Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on  
the memory card, proceed to Step 3. Note that if the  
memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first  
256 images will be printed. A warning will be displayed if  
the page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index  
print.  
3
4
Adjust printing options.  
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 265.  
Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been printed, press J.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to  
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers  
and devices that support DPOF (0 485).  
1
Choose DPOF print order >  
Select/set.  
Select DPOF print order in the  
playback menu, then highlight  
Select/set and press 2 (to remove  
all photographs from the print  
order, select Deselect all).  
2
Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures (to view images in other  
locations, press W and select the  
desired card and folder as  
described on page 237; to display  
the current picture full screen, press  
and hold the X button) and, keeping the L (Z/Q) button  
pressed, press 1 or 3 to choose the number of prints  
(maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set the number of prints  
to zero. Press J when all the desired pictures have been  
selected.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and  
press 2 to toggle the highlighted  
option on or off.  
Print shooting data: Print shutter  
speed and aperture on all pictures  
in print order.  
Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print  
order.  
Complete the print order.  
Press J to complete the print order.  
D DPOF Print Orders  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a  
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and  
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the  
current order (0 266). DPOF print date and shooting data options are  
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the  
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the  
PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough  
space on the memory card to store the print order.  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 79) can not be selected for printing using  
this option. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the  
NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 399).  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a  
computer or other device after the print order is created.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable  
(0 440) or a type C HDMI cable (available separately from third-  
party suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-  
definition video devices. Always turn the camera off before  
connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
Connect to  
camera  
Connect to high-definition  
device (choose cable with  
connector for HDMI device)  
Tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on  
and press the K button. During playback, images will be  
displayed on the television screen. Volume can be adjusted  
using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.  
A The HDMI Cable Clip  
When using the optional Nikon HDMI cable, attach the supplied clip as  
shown to prevent accidental disconnection. Do not use cable clips  
with non-Nikon cables.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HDMI Options  
The HDMI option in the setup menu (0 365) controls output  
resolution and other advanced HDMI options.  
❚❚ Output Resolution  
Choose the format for images output  
to the HDMI device. If Auto is selected,  
the camera will automatically select  
the appropriate format.  
❚❚ Advanced  
Option  
Description  
Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera  
is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal  
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from  
the following options:  
Limited range: For devices with an RGB video signal  
input range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you  
notice loss of detail in shadows.  
Output range  
Full range: For devices with an RGB video signal input  
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if shadows are  
“washed out” or too bright.  
Output display Choose horizontal and vertical frame coverage for  
size  
HDMI output from 95% or 100%.  
If Off is selected when the camera is connected to an  
HDMI device, shooting information will not be  
displayed in the monitor during live view photography.  
Choose On to mirror the HDMI display on the camera  
monitor, Off to turn the camera monitor off to save  
power. Dual monitor turns on automatically when  
Live view on-screen display is Off.  
Live view on-  
screen display  
Dual monitor  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Television Playback  
Use of an AC adapter and power connector (available separately) is  
recommended for extended playback. If the edges of photographs are  
not visible in the television display, select 95% for HDMI >  
Advanced > Output display size (0 270).  
A HDMI and Live View  
When the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, HDMI displays can  
be used for live view photography and movie live view (0 48, 59).  
Note that if 1920 × 1080; 60p is selected for the Movie settings >  
Frame size/frame rate option in the shooting menu (0 62), the  
selected setting will only be reflected in the HDMI output during  
movie recording if all the following conditions are met: Auto or 1080p  
(progressive) is selected for HDMI > Output resolution, 100% is  
selected for HDMI > Advanced > Output display size, and Off is  
selected for HDMI > Advanced > Live view on-screen display  
(0 270). At other settings, the output resolution, display size, or frame  
rate may differ from that selected in the camera menus.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Guide  
Defaults  
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are  
listed below. For information on two-button reset, see page 206.  
❚❚ Playback Menu Defaults  
Option  
Playback folder (0 281)  
Default  
ND810  
Off  
Show next  
On  
Image review (0 287)  
After delete (0 287)  
Rotate tall (0 288)  
Slide show (0 288)  
Image type (0 288)  
Frame interval (0 288)  
Still images and movies  
2 s  
1
❚❚ Shooting Menu Defaults  
Option  
Extended menu banks (0 292)  
File naming (0 295)  
Default  
Off  
DSC  
Primary slot selection (0 86)  
Secondary slot function (0 86)  
Image quality (0 79)  
SD card slot  
Overflow  
JPEG normal  
JPEG/TIFF recording (0 295)  
Image size (0 83)  
Large  
JPEG compression (0 81)  
NEF (RAW) recording (0 295)  
Image size (0 85)  
NEF (RAW) compression (0 81)  
NEF (RAW) bit depth (0 82)  
Size priority  
Large  
Lossless compressed  
14-bit  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Option  
Default  
Image area (0 74)  
Choose image area (0 75)  
Auto DX crop (0 75)  
FX (36×24)  
On  
White balance (0 148)  
Fine-tuning (0 151)  
Choose color temp. (0 155)  
Preset manual (0 158)  
Auto > Normal  
A-B: 0, G-M: 0  
5000 K  
d-1  
Set Picture Control (0 170)  
Color space (0 296)  
Standard  
sRGB  
Active D-Lighting (0 182)  
HDR (high dynamic range) (0 184)  
HDR mode (0 185)  
Exposure differential (0 186)  
Smoothing (0 186)  
Vignette control (0 297)  
Auto distortion control (0 298)  
Long exposure NR (0 299)  
High ISO NR (0 299)  
Off  
Off  
Auto  
Normal  
Normal  
Off  
Off  
Normal  
ISO sensitivity settings (0 109)  
ISO sensitivity (0 109)  
100  
Off  
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 111)  
Multiple exposure (0 209) 2  
Multiple exposure mode (0 210)  
Number of shots (0 211)  
Auto gain (0 212)  
Off  
2
On  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Interval timer shooting (0 216)  
Start options (0 217)  
Default  
Off  
Now  
Interval (0 217)  
1 min.  
0001×1  
Off  
Off  
5 s  
No. of intervals×shots/interval (0 218)  
Exposure smoothing (0 218)  
Time-lapse photography (0 223)  
Interval (0 224)  
Shooting time (0 224)  
Exposure smoothing (0 224)  
Movie settings (0 62)  
25 minutes  
On  
Frame size/frame rate (0 62)  
Movie quality (0 62)  
1920 × 1080; 60p  
Normal  
Microphone sensitivity (0 62)  
Frequency response (0 63)  
Wind noise reduction (0 63)  
Destination (0 63)  
Auto sensitivity  
Wide range  
Off  
SD card slot  
ISO sensitivity (mode M): 100  
Auto ISO control (mode M): Off  
Maximum sensitivity: 12800  
Movie ISO sensitivity settings (0 64)  
1
2
Default settings can be restored using Shooting menu bank (0 291). With the  
exception of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure, Interval timer  
shooting, and Time-lapse photography, only settings in the current shooting  
menu bank will be reset.  
Shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is in progress.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
❚❚ Custom Settings Menu Defaults  
Option  
a1 AF-C priority selection (0 306)  
a2 AF-S priority selection (0 307)  
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on (0 308)  
a4 AF activation (0 308)  
Default  
Release  
Focus  
3 (Normal)  
Shutter/AF-ON  
a5 Focus point illumination (0 309)  
Manual focus mode  
On  
Off  
Dynamic-area AF display  
Group-area AF illumination  
o (Squares)  
Auto  
No wrap  
51 points  
Off  
a6 AF point illumination (0 310)  
a7 Focus point wrap-around (0 310)  
a8 Number of focus points (0 311)  
a9 Store by orientation (0 312)  
a10 Built-in AF-assist illuminator (0 313)  
a12 Autofocus mode restrictions (0 314)  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value (0 315)  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl (0 315)  
b3 Exp./flash comp. step value (0 315)  
b4 Easy exposure compensation (0 316)  
b5 Matrix metering (0 317)  
On  
No restrictions  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
Off  
Face detection on  
ø 12 mm  
b6 Center-weighted area (0 317)  
b7 Fine-tune optimal exposure (0 318)  
Matrix metering  
0
0
0
0
Center-weighted metering  
Spot metering  
Highlight-weighted metering  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L (0 319)  
c2 Standby timer (0 319)  
c3 Self-timer (0 319)  
Self-timer delay  
Default  
Off  
6 s  
10 s  
1
Number of shots  
Interval between shots  
0.5 s  
c4 Monitor off delay (0 320)  
Playback  
10 s  
1 min  
10 s  
Menus  
Information display  
Image review  
4 s  
Live view  
10 min  
d1 Beep (0 321)  
Volume  
Off  
Pitch  
Low  
d2 CL mode shooting speed (0 321)  
d3 Max. continuous release (0 322)  
d4 Exposure delay mode (0 322)  
d5 Electronic front-curtain shutter (0 323)  
d6 File number sequence (0 324)  
d7 Viewfinder grid display (0 325)  
d8 ISO display and adjustment (0 325)  
d9 Screen tips (0 325)  
d10 Information display (0 326)  
d11 LCD illumination (0 326)  
d12 MB-D12 battery type (0 327)  
d13 Battery order (0 328)  
3 fps  
100  
Off  
Disable  
On  
Off  
Show frame count  
On  
Auto  
Off  
LR6 (AA alkaline)  
Use MB-D12 batteries first  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
e1 Flash sync speed (0 329)  
e2 Flash shutter speed (0 331)  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/Optional flash  
Default  
1/250 s  
1/60 s  
TTL  
e4 Exposure comp. for flash (0 338)  
e5 Modeling flash (0 338)  
e6 Auto bracketing set (0 338)  
e7 Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0 339)  
e8 Bracketing order (0 340)  
f1 D switch (0 341)  
Entire frame  
On  
AE & flash  
Flash/speed  
MTR > under > over  
LCD backlight (D)  
f2 Multi selector center button (0 341)  
Shooting mode  
Select center focus point  
Thumbnail on/off  
Playback mode  
Live view  
Select center focus point  
Do nothing  
f3 Multi selector (0 343)  
f4 Assign Fn button (0 343)  
Press (0 344)  
Press + command dials (0 348)  
f5 Assign preview button (0 349)  
Press  
Viewfinder virtual horizon  
None  
Preview  
None  
Press + command dials  
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 349)  
Press  
AE/AF lock  
None  
Press + command dials  
f7 Shutter spd & aperture lock (0 350)  
Shutter speed lock  
Off  
Off  
Aperture lock  
f8 Assign BKT button (0 350)  
Auto bracketing  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Default  
f9 Customize command dials (0 351)  
Exposure compensation: U  
Shutter speed/aperture: U  
Exposure setting: Off  
Autofocus setting: Off  
Sub-command dial  
Off  
Reverse rotation (0 351)  
Change main/sub (0 351)  
Aperture setting (0 352)  
Menus and playback (0 352)  
Sub-dial frame advance (0 352)  
f10 Release button to use dial (0 353)  
f11 Slot empty release lock (0 354)  
f12 Reverse indicators (0 354)  
f13 Assign movie record button (0 355)  
Press + command dials  
f14 Live view button options (0 356)  
f15 Assign MB-D12 AF-ON (0 356)  
f16 Assign remote (WR) Fn button (0 357)  
f17 Lens focus function buttons (0 359)  
g1 Assign Fn button (0 361)  
Press  
10 frames  
No  
Enable release  
None  
Enable  
AF-ON  
None  
AF lock only  
None  
g2 Assign preview button (0 362)  
Press  
Index marking  
g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 363)  
Press  
AE/AF lock  
g4 Assign shutter button (0 364)  
Take photos  
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using Custom settings  
bank (0 304).  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Setup Menu Defaults  
Option  
Monitor brightness (0 367)  
Monitor color balance (0 368)  
Clean image sensor (0 445)  
Clean at startup/shutdown (0 446)  
Flicker reduction (0 371)  
Time zone and date (0 372)  
Daylight saving time (0 372)  
Auto image rotation (0 373)  
HDMI (0 269)  
Default  
0
A-B: 0, G-M: 0  
Clean at startup & shutdown  
Auto  
Off  
On  
Output resolution (0 270)  
Advanced (0 270)  
Auto  
Output range  
Output display size  
Live view on-screen display  
Dual monitor  
Auto  
100%  
Off  
On  
Location data (0 234)  
Standby timer  
Set clock from satellite  
Eye-Fi upload (0 382)  
Enable  
Yes  
Enable  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K  
(playback menu) tab.  
G button  
Playback Menu Options  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Option  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
DPOF print order  
0
0
Delete  
Playback folder  
Hide image  
Playback display options  
Copy image(s)  
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 272.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback (0 235).  
G button D playback menu  
Option  
ND810  
All  
Description  
Pictures in all folders created with the D810 will be visible  
during playback.  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during  
playback.  
Current  
Hide Image  
G button D playback menu  
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden  
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only  
be deleted by formatting the memory card.  
D Protected and Hidden Images  
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the  
image.  
1
Choose Select/set.  
Highlight Select/set and press 2 (to  
skip the remaining steps and reveal  
all pictures, highlight Deselect all  
and press J).  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
3
Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the memory  
card (to view the highlighted picture  
full screen, press and hold the X  
button; to view images in other  
locations, press W and select the  
desired card and folder as described on page 237) and press  
the center of the multi selector to select the current picture.  
Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect a  
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector  
again. Continue until all the desired pictures have been  
selected.  
Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
Playback Display Options  
G button D playback menu  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0 238). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an  
option, then press 2 to select the option for the photo  
information display. A L appears next to selected items; to  
deselect, highlight an item and press 2. To return to the  
playback menu, press J.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copy Image(s)  
G button D playback menu  
Copy pictures from one memory card to another. This option is  
only available when two memory cards are inserted in the  
camera.  
Option  
Select source  
Select image(s)  
Select destination  
folder  
Description  
Choose card from which pictures will be copied.  
Select pictures to be copied.  
Select destination folder on remaining card.  
Copy selected pictures to specified destination.  
Copy image(s)?  
1
2
3
Choose Select source.  
Highlight Select source and press 2.  
Select the source card.  
Highlight the slot for the card  
containing the images to be copied  
and press J.  
Choose Select image(s).  
Highlight Select image(s) and press  
2.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Select the source folder.  
Highlight the folder containing the  
images to be copied and press 2.  
Make the initial selection.  
Before going on select or deselect  
individual images, you can mark all or  
all protected images in the folder for  
copying by choosing Select all  
images or Select protected images.  
To mark only individually selected  
images for copying, choose Deselect all before proceeding.  
6
Select additional images.  
Highlight pictures and press the  
center of the multi selector to select  
or deselect (to view the highlighted  
picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button). Selected images are  
marked with a L. Press J to proceed  
to Step 7 when your selection is complete.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
8
Choose Select destination folder.  
Highlight Select destination folder  
and press 2.  
Select a destination folder.  
To enter a folder number, choose  
Select folder by number, enter the  
number (0 293), and press J.  
To choose from a list of existing  
folders, choose Select folder from  
list, highlight a folder, and press J.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Copy the images.  
Highlight Copy image(s)? and press  
J.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.  
Press J again to exit when copying is  
complete.  
D Copying Images  
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the  
destination card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying  
movies.  
If the destination folder contains an image  
with the same name as one of the images to  
be copied, a confirmation dialog will be  
displayed. Select Replace existing image  
to replace the image with the image to be  
copied, or select Replace all to replace all  
existing images with the same names  
without further prompting. To continue without replacing the image,  
select Skip, or select Cancel to exit without copying any further  
images. Hidden or protected files in the destination folder will not be  
replaced.  
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0 267) is  
not. Hidden images can not be copied.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Review  
G button D playback menu  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures  
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.  
After Delete  
G button D playback menu  
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.  
Option  
Description  
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last  
frame, previous picture will be displayed.  
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first  
Show next  
S
T
Show  
previous frame, following picture will be displayed.  
If user was scrolling through pictures in order  
recorded, following picture will be displayed as  
Continue  
described for Show next. If user was scrolling through  
as before  
U
pictures in reverse order, previous picture will be  
displayed as described for Show previous.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Rotate Tall  
G button D playback menu  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for  
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is  
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images  
are not rotated automatically during image review.  
Option  
Description  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated  
for display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off  
selected for Auto image rotation (0 373) will be displayed in  
“wide” (landscape) orientation.  
On  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”  
(landscape) orientation.  
Off  
Slide Show  
G button D playback menu  
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder  
(0 281). Hidden images (0 281) are not displayed.  
Option  
Start  
Description  
Start slide show.  
Choose type of image displayed from Still images  
and movies, Still images only, and Movies only.  
Image type  
Frame interval Choose how long each photo will be displayed.  
To start the slide show, highlight Start  
and press J. The following operations  
can be performed while the slide show is  
in progress:  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To  
Press  
Description  
Skip back/skip  
ahead  
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to  
skip to next frame.  
View additional  
photo info  
Change or hide photo info displayed (still  
images only; 0 238).  
Pause  
Pause slide show. Select Restart to resume.  
J
Exit to playback  
menu  
End slide show and return to playback  
menu.  
G
Exit to playback  
mode  
End slide show and exit to playback mode.  
K
Exit to shooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway to  
return to shooting mode.  
The dialog shown at right is displayed  
when the show ends. Select Restart to  
restart or Exit to return to the playback  
menu.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C  
(shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
Shooting Menu Options  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
Extended menu banks  
Storage folder  
0
Option  
0
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
Vignette control  
Auto distortion control  
Long exposure NR  
High ISO NR  
File naming  
Primary slot selection  
Secondary slot function  
Image quality  
JPEG/TIFF recording  
NEF (RAW) recording  
Image area  
White balance  
Set Picture Control  
Manage Picture Control  
81, 83 ISO sensitivity settings  
Multiple exposure  
Interval timer shooting  
Time-lapse photography  
Movie settings  
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 272.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Shooting Menu Bank  
G button C shooting menu  
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the  
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,  
Interval timer shooting, Time-lapse photography, and  
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual  
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on  
the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used  
settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these  
settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when  
the camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the  
bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can be  
stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly  
from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate  
bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be  
added as described on page 178 by highlighting the menu bank  
and pressing 2.  
A Shooting Menu Bank  
The information display shows the current  
shooting menu bank.  
A See Also  
Exposure and flash modes, shutter speed, and aperture can be  
included in shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks  
option in the shooting menu (0 292).  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings  
To restore default settings, highlight a  
bank in the Shooting menu bank menu  
and press O (Q). A confirmation dialog  
will be displayed; highlight Yes and  
press J to restore default settings for  
the selected bank. See page 272 for a list  
of default settings.  
O (Q) button  
Extended Menu Banks  
G button C shooting menu  
Select On to include exposure and flash modes, shutter speed  
(modes f and h only), and aperture (modes g and h only) in the  
information recorded in each of the four shooting menu banks,  
to be recalled whenever the bank is selected. Selecting Off  
restores the values in effect before On was selected.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Storage Folder  
G button C shooting menu  
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.  
❚❚ Select Folder by Number  
1
Choose Select folder by number.  
Highlight Select folder by number  
and press 2. The dialog shown at  
right will be displayed, with the  
current primary slot (0 86)  
underlined.  
2
Choose a folder number.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a  
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y  
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:  
W : Folder is empty.  
X : Folder is partially full.  
Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered  
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.  
3
Save changes and exit.  
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting  
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the  
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not  
already exist, a new folder will be created on the card in the  
primary slot. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the  
selected folder unless it is already full.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ Select Folder from List  
1
Choose Select folder from list.  
Highlight Select folder from list and  
press 2.  
2
3
Highlight a folder.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.  
Select the highlighted folder.  
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the  
shooting menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in  
the selected folder.  
D Folder and File Numbers  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a  
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no  
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a  
folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a  
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
A Startup Time  
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card  
contains a very large number of files or folders.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Naming  
G button C shooting menu  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,  
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space  
(0 296), “_DSC, followed by a four-digit number and a three-  
letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option  
is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the  
file name. For information on editing file names, see page 178.  
A Extensions  
The following extensions are used: .NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, .TIF”  
for TIFF (RGB) images, .JPG” for JPEG images, .MOV” for movies, and  
.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs  
recorded at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and  
JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions.  
JPEG/TIFF Recording  
G button C shooting menu  
Adjust size settings for photographs taken in JPEG and TIFF  
formats (0 83) and choose a compression option for JPEG  
photographs (0 81).  
NEF (RAW) Recording  
G button C shooting menu  
Choose the compression (0 81), bit-depth (0 82), and size  
(0 85) of photographs recorded in NEF (RAW) format.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Color Space  
G button C shooting menu  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for  
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for movies and for  
photographs taken for general-purpose printing and display,  
while Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of colors, is  
recommended for photographs taken for professional  
publication and commercial printing.  
A Adobe RGB  
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require  
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.  
A Color Space  
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Nikon’s Capture NX-D software (0 260)  
automatically select the correct color space when opening  
photographs created with this camera. Results can not be guaranteed  
with third-party software.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vignette Control  
G button C shooting menu  
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a  
photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E,  
and D lenses (PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to  
lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose  
from High, Normal, Low, and Off.  
A Vignette Control  
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF  
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral  
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls  
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the  
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.  
Vignette control does not apply to movies (0 49), multiple exposures  
(0 209), or pictures taken with an FX lens and DX (24 × 16) selected for  
Image area > Choose image area (0 75) or with a DX lens, an option  
other than DX (24 × 16) selected for Choose image area, and Off  
selected for Image area > Auto DX crop (0 75).  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Auto Distortion Control  
G button C shooting menu  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-  
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when  
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible  
in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph,  
and that the time needed to process photographs before  
recording begins may increase). This option does not apply to  
movies and is available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC,  
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not  
guaranteed with other lenses. Before using auto distortion  
control with DX lenses, select On for Auto DX crop or choose an  
image area of DX (24×16) as described on page 75; selecting  
other options may result in heavily cropped photographs or in  
photographs with severe peripheral distortion.  
A Retouch: Distortion Control  
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with  
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 405.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Long Exposure NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)  
G button C shooting menu  
If On is selected, photographs taken at  
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be  
processed to reduce noise (bright spots,  
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog).  
The time required for processing  
roughly doubles; during processing,  
l m” will flash in the shutter  
speed/aperture displays and pictures  
can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is  
complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not  
be performed). In continuous release mode, frame rates will  
slow and while photographs are being processed, the capacity  
of the memory buffer will drop. Long exposure noise reduction  
is not available during movie recording.  
High ISO NR  
G button C shooting menu  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to  
reduce noise.  
Option  
High  
Description  
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly  
in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the  
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,  
and Low.  
Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at  
an amount higher than when Low is selected.  
Normal  
Low  
Off  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the  
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit  
individual preferences.  
Custom Setting groups  
Main menu  
Custom settings  
bank (0 304)  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Custom Settings  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
0
Custom settings bank  
a
Autofocus  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 AF-S priority selection  
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on  
a4 AF activation  
a5 Focus point illumination  
a6 AF point illumination  
a7 Focus point wrap-around  
a8 Number of focus points  
a9 Store by orientation  
a10 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a11 Limit AF-area mode selection  
a12 Autofocus mode restrictions  
b
Metering/exposure  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl  
b3 Exp./flash comp. step value  
b4 Easy exposure compensation  
b5 Matrix metering  
b6 Center-weighted area  
b7 Fine-tune optimal exposure  
c
Timers/AE lock  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Standby timer  
c3 Self-timer  
c4 Monitor off delay  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Custom Setting  
0
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
d2 CL mode shooting speed  
d3 Max. continuous release  
d4 Exposure delay mode  
d5 Electronic front-curtain shutter  
d6 File number sequence  
d7 Viewfinder grid display  
d8 ISO display and adjustment  
d9 Screen tips  
d10 Information display  
d11 LCD illumination  
d12 MB-D12 battery type  
d13 Battery order  
e
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e4 Exposure comp. for flash  
e5 Modeling flash  
e6 Auto bracketing set  
e7 Auto bracketing (Mode M)  
e8 Bracketing order  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Setting  
0
f
Controls  
f1 D switch  
f2 Multi selector center button  
f3 Multi selector  
f4 Assign Fn button  
f5 Assign preview button  
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f7 Shutter spd & aperture lock  
f8 Assign BKT button  
f9 Customize command dials  
f10 Release button to use dial  
f11 Slot empty release lock  
f12 Reverse indicators  
f13 Assign movie record button  
f14 Live view button options  
f15 Assign MB-D12 AF-ON  
f16 Assign remote (WR) Fn button  
f17 Lens focus function buttons  
g
Movie  
g1 Assign Fn button  
g2 Assign preview button  
g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
g4 Assign shutter button  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Settings Bank  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to  
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a  
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of  
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new  
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is  
turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is  
selected. Different combinations of settings can be stored in the  
other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one  
combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from  
the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be  
added as described on page 178 by highlighting the menu bank  
and pressing 2.  
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings  
To restore default settings, highlight a  
bank in the Custom settings bank  
menu and press O (Q). A confirmation  
dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes  
and press J to restore default settings  
for the selected bank (0 275).  
O (Q) button  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Custom Settings Bank  
The information display shows the current  
Custom Settings bank.  
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 275. If settings in the current bank  
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed  
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom  
Settings menu.  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a: Autofocus  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 87), this  
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever  
the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only  
when the camera is in focus (focus priority).  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
Release  
G
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in  
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for  
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
Release +  
focus  
E
F
Focus  
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is  
selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust  
focus until the shutter is released.  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
a2: AF-S Priority Selection  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
When AF-S is selected for viewfinder photography (0 87), this  
option controls whether photographs can be taken only when  
the camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-  
release button is pressed (release priority).  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
Release  
G
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
Focus  
F
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is  
displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will  
lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus  
lock continues until the shutter is released.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large  
changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C (0 87) is  
selected during viewfinder photography.  
Option  
Description  
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the  
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting  
the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera  
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by  
objects passing through the frame. Note that 2,  
1 (Short), and Off are equivalent to 3 (Normal) when  
3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area  
mode.  
5 (Long)  
C
(
D
)
4
3 (Normal)  
2
1 (Short)  
E
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the  
distance to the subject changes. Use when  
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances  
in quick succession.  
Off  
a4: AF Activation  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the shutter-release button  
and the B button can be used to initiate autofocus. Select  
AF-ON only to prevent the camera focusing when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway.  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
a5: Focus Point Illumination  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose from the following focus point display options.  
Option  
Description  
Choose On to display the active focus point in manual  
focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during  
focus point selection.  
Manual focus  
mode  
Choose On to display both the selected focus point and  
the surrounding focus points in dynamic-area AF mode  
(0 90). When 3D-tracking is used, a dot will be displayed  
in the center of the focus point (n). Select Off to display  
only the selected focus point.  
Dynamic-area  
AF display  
Choose how the active  
focus points are displayed  
Option  
Focus point display  
in group-area AF (0 91).  
Group-area  
AF  
o
illumination  
p
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
a6: AF Point Illumination  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in  
the viewfinder.  
Option  
Auto  
Description  
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as  
needed to establish contrast with the background.  
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless  
of the brightness of the background. Depending on the  
brightness of the background, the selected focus point  
may be difficult to see.  
On  
The selected focus point is not highlighted. The area  
outside the current crop is shown in grey (0 76).  
Off  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one  
edge of the viewfinder to another.  
Option  
Description  
Focus-point selection “wraps  
around” from top to bottom,  
bottom to top, right to left, and  
left to right, so that, for  
w
q
Wrap  
example, pressing 2 when a  
focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is  
highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus point at  
the left edge of the display (w).  
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost  
focus points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus  
point at the right edge of the display is selected has no  
effect.  
No wrap  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
a8: Number of Focus Points  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-  
point selection.  
Option  
Description  
Choose from the 51 focus  
points shown at right.  
51 points  
B
A
Choose from the 11 focus  
11 points points shown at right. Use for  
quick focus-point selection.  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
a9: Store by Orientation  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for  
“wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation  
with the camera rotated 90 ° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation  
with the camera rotated 90 ° counterclockwise.  
Select Off to use the same focus point and AF-area mode  
regardless of camera orientation.  
Camera rotated 90 °  
counter-clockwise  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90 °  
clockwise  
Choose Focus point to enable separate focus-point selection, or  
Focus point and AF-area mode to enable separate selection of  
both the focus point and the AF-area mode.  
Camera rotated 90 °  
counter-clockwise  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90 °  
clockwise  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
a10: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist  
illuminator lights to assist the focus  
operation when lighting is poor.  
Option  
On  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor  
(viewfinder photography only). AF-assist illumination is only  
available when both of the following conditions are met:  
1
AF-S is selected for autofocus mode (0 87).  
2 Auto-area AF is chosen for AF-area mode (0 90), or an  
option other than auto-area AF is chosen and the center  
focus point is selected.  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus  
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using  
autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
A The AF-Assist Illuminator  
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft  
10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood.  
A See Also  
See page 425 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF  
assist.  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
a11: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the AF-area modes that can be  
selected using the AF-mode button and  
sub-command dial in viewfinder  
photography (live view is unaffected;  
0 90). Highlight the desired modes and  
press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to  
save changes when settings are  
complete.  
a12: Autofocus Mode Restrictions  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the autofocus modes available  
in viewfinder photography (0 87). If  
only one mode is selected, the  
autofocus mode can not be chosen  
using the AF-mode button and main  
command dial.  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b: Metering/Exposure  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO  
sensitivity (0 109). If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting  
is maintained when the step value is changed. If the current ISO  
sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value, ISO  
sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting.  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter  
speed, aperture, and bracketing.  
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to  
exposure and flash compensation.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set  
exposure compensation (0 130). If On (Auto reset) or On is  
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash  
even when exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the  
command dials (see note below). The setting selected  
using the command dial is reset when the camera turns  
off or the standby timer expires (exposure  
compensation settings selected using the E button are  
not reset).  
On (Auto reset)  
As above, except that the exposure compensation  
value selected using the command dial is not reset  
when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.  
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button  
and rotating the main command dial.  
On  
Off  
A Change Main/Sub  
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or  
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)  
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f9 (Customize  
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 351).  
Customize command dials > Change main/sub  
Off  
On  
e
f
g
h
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
N/A  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Show ISO/Easy ISO  
Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation) can not be used  
with Custom Setting d8 (ISO display and adjustment) > Show ISO/  
Easy ISO (0 325). Adjustments to either of these items reset the  
remaining item; a message is displayed when the item is reset.  
b5: Matrix Metering  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose U Face detection on to enable face detection when  
shooting portraits with matrix metering during viewfinder  
photography (0 114).  
b6: Center-Weighted Area  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering assigns  
the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame. The  
diameter (φ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12, 15, or 20 mm or to  
the average of the entire frame.  
Note that when a non-CPU lens is used, the area assigned the  
greatest weight for center-weighted metering is equivalent to a  
circle with a diameter of 12 mm, regardless of the setting  
selected for Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu (0 229).  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b7: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the  
camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each  
metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1  
6 EV.  
/
D Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank  
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure  
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine  
how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-  
tuning menu. Exposure compensation (0 130) is preferred in most  
situations.  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
c: Timers/AE Lock  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
c2: Standby Timer  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure  
when no operations are performed. The shutter-speed and  
aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off  
automatically when the standby timer expires.  
Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life.  
c3: Self-Timer  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of  
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode  
(0 106).  
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.  
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when  
the Number of shots is more than 1.  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
c4: Monitor off Delay  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose how long the monitor remains  
on when no operations are performed  
during playback (Playback; defaults to  
10 s) and image review (Image review;  
defaults to 4 s), when menus (Menus;  
defaults to 1 minute) or information  
(Information display; defaults to 10 s)  
are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live  
view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off  
delay for longer battery life.  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
d: Shooting/Display  
d1: Beep  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the  
camera focuses using single-servo AF (AF-S; 0 87), when focus  
locks during live view photography, while the release timer is  
counting down in self-timer mode (0 106) when the shutter-  
release button is pressed a second time to take a picture in  
mirror-up mode (0 108), when time-lapse photography ends  
(0 223), or if you attempt to take a photograph when the  
memory card is locked (0 22).  
Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium),  
1 (low) or Off (mute). When an option  
other than Off is selected, c appears in  
the control panel and information  
display.  
Pitch: Choose High or Low.  
A Beep  
Note that regardless of the option selected, a beep will not sound  
when the camera focuses in movie live view (0 49) or quiet-shutter  
release mode (modes J and M; 0 102).  
d2: CL Mode Shooting Speed  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in T (continuous low  
speed) mode (0 104).  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
d3: Max. Continuous Release  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single  
burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and  
100. Note that this setting has no effect at shutter speeds of 4 s  
or slower.  
A The Memory Buffer  
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will  
slow when the memory buffer fills (tAA). See page 489 for more  
information on the capacity of the memory buffer.  
d4: Exposure Delay Mode  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur  
pictures, select 1 s, 2 s, or 3 s to delay shutter release until one,  
two, or three seconds after the mirror is raised.  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Select Enable to enable the electronic front-curtain shutter in  
V mode, eliminating blur caused by shutter motion. A  
mechanical shutter is used in other release modes.  
A The Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter  
A type G, D, or E lens is recommended; select Disable if you notice lines  
or fog when shooting with other lenses. The fastest shutter speed  
available with the electronic front-curtain shutter is 1  
2000 s.  
/
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
d6: File Number Sequence  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by  
adding one to the last file number used. This option controls  
whether file numbering continues from the last number used  
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a  
new memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted,  
or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file  
numbering continues from the last number used or from  
the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is  
higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder  
contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will  
be created automatically and file numbering will begin  
again from 0001.  
On  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is  
created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory  
card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is  
created automatically if a photograph is taken when the  
current folder contains 999 photographs.  
Off  
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is  
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file  
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file  
numbering is reset to 0001.  
Reset  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999  
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release  
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.  
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 (File number sequence) and  
then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory  
card.  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
d7: Viewfinder Grid Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for  
reference when composing photographs (0 6).  
d8: ISO Display and Adjustment  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, the  
control panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of  
exposures remaining. If Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, ISO  
sensitivity can be set in exposure modes e and f by rotating the  
sub-command dial or in mode g by rotating the main command  
dial. Select Show frame count to display the number of  
exposures remaining in the viewfinder and control panel.  
d9: Screen Tips  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose On to display tool tips for highlighted item in the  
b-button display during viewfinder photography (0 205).  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
d10: Information Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the  
information display (0 201) will automatically change from  
black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the  
background. To always use the same color lettering, select  
Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light  
on dark (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will  
automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the  
selected text color.  
Dark on light  
Light on dark  
d11: LCD Illumination  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If Off is selected, the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator)  
will only light while the power switch is rotated toward D. If On  
is selected, the control panel will be illuminated whenever the  
standby timer is active (0 34). Select Off for increased battery  
life.  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
d12: MB-D12 Battery Type  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the  
optional MB-D12 battery pack is used with AA batteries, match  
the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted  
in the battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when  
using EN-EL15 or optional EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 batteries.  
Option  
Description  
LR6 (AA alkaline) Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.  
1
2
3
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)  
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.  
FR6 (AA lithium) Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.  
A Using AA Batteries  
The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below  
20 °C (68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some  
cases, batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some  
AA batteries can not be used; due to their performance characteristics  
and limited capacity, alkaline batteries have less capacity than some  
other types and should only be used if no alternative is available and  
then only at warmer temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA  
batteries as follows:  
Control panel Viewfinder  
Description  
L
d
Batteries fully charged.  
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.  
Shutter release disabled. Change  
batteries.  
I
H
(flashes)  
d
(flashes)  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
d13: Battery Order  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the  
battery pack are used first when an optional MB-D12 battery  
pack is attached. Note that if the MB-D12 is powered by an  
optional AC adapter and power connector, the AC adapter will be  
used regardless of the option selected.  
A s icon is displayed in the camera  
control panel when the batteries in the  
MB-D12 are in use.  
A The MB-D12 Battery Pack  
The MB-D12 takes one EN-EL15 or EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 rechargeable  
Li-ion battery or eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium batteries (an  
EN-EL15 is supplied with the camera; EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 and AA  
batteries are available separately).  
The information display shows the type of  
battery inserted in the MB-D12 as follows:  
MB-D12 battery type display  
v
Battery type  
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion  
battery  
x
u
AA batteries  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
e: Bracketing/Flash  
e1: Flash Sync Speed  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option controls flash sync speed.  
Option  
Description  
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible  
flash unit is attached (0 430). If the built-in flash or  
1/320 s  
(Auto FP)  
other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1  
/
320 s.  
When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1  
exposure mode e or g, auto FP high-speed sync will be  
activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1  
/320 s in  
/
320 s.  
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible  
flash unit is attached (0 430). If the built-in flash or  
1/250 s  
(Auto FP)  
other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1  
/
250 s.  
When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1  
exposure mode e or g, auto FP high-speed sync will be  
activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1  
/250 s in  
/
250 s.  
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.  
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or  
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the  
slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or &). An X (flash sync indicator)  
will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.  
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by  
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for  
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright  
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”  
when auto FP high-speed sync is active (0 194).  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
❚❚ Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for  
Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 329), the built-in flash  
can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1  
/
320 s or 1  
250 s, while  
/
compatible optional flash units (0 430) can be used at any  
shutter speed (Auto FP High-Speed Sync).  
Flash sync speed 1/320 s (Auto FP) 1/250 s (Auto FP)  
1/250 s  
Built-in Optional Built-in Optional Built-in Optional  
flash flash unit flash flash unit flash flash unit  
Shutter speed  
From 1  
8000 to but not  
including 1  
From 1  
320 to but not  
including 1  
/
Auto FP  
Auto FP  
Auto FP  
/
320 s  
/
Flash sync*  
/250 s  
1
/250–30 s  
Flash sync  
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases. Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that  
obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP.  
D The Flash-Ready Indicator  
When the flash fires at full power, the flash-indicator in the camera  
viewfinder will flash to warn that the resulting photograph may be  
underexposed. Note that the flash-ready indicators on optional flash  
units will not display this warning when 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected.  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e2: Flash Shutter Speed  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option determines the slowest shutter speed available  
when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in  
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto exposure modes  
(regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow  
as 30 s in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at  
flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye  
reduction with slow sync).  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.  
Option  
TTL  
Description  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to  
shooting conditions.  
Choose the flash level. The camera does not emit  
monitor pre-flashes.  
r
s
Manual  
Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open,  
t
flash  
producing a strobe-light effect.  
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling  
remote optional flash units in one or more groups  
(0 334).  
Commander  
mode  
u
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
❚❚ Manual  
Choose a flash level. Flash level is stated in fractions of full  
power: at full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of  
12/39 (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).  
❚❚ Repeating Flash  
The flash fires repeatedly while the  
shutter is open, producing a strobe-light  
effect. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the  
following options, 1 or 3 to change.  
Option  
Output  
Description  
Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full  
power).  
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected  
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the  
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of  
flashes may be less than selected.  
Times  
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.  
A Flash Control Mode  
The flash control mode for the built-in flash  
is shown in the information display (0 194,  
A “Manual” and “Repeating Flash”  
Y icons flash in the control panel and viewfinder when these options  
are selected.  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A The SB-400 and SB-300  
When an optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit is attached and turned  
on, Custom Setting e3 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash  
control mode for the optional flash unit to be selected from TTL and  
Manual.  
A “Times“  
The options available for Repeating Flash > Times are determined by  
flash output.  
Output Options available for “Times”  
Output Options available for “Times”  
1/4  
1/8  
1/16  
2
2–5  
2–10  
1/32  
1/64  
2–10, 15  
2–10, 15, 20, 25  
1/128 2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Commander Mode  
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more  
remote optional flash units in up to two groups (A and B) using  
advanced wireless lighting (0 430).  
Selecting this option displays the menu  
shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to  
highlight the following options, 1 or 3  
to change.  
Option  
Built-in  
flash  
Description  
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values  
TTL  
M
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1  
3 EV.  
/
Choose the flash level.  
The built-in flash does not fire, although remote flash units  
– – do. The built-in flash must be raised so that it can emit  
monitor pre-flashes.  
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values  
TTL  
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1  
3 EV.  
/
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;  
AA  
M
0 430). Choose flash compensation from values between  
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1  
3 EV.  
/
Choose the flash level.  
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.  
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The  
Group B options available are the same as those listed for Group A,  
above.  
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups  
must be set to the same channel.  
Channel  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander  
mode.  
1
2
3
4
5
Adjust settings for the built-in flash.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the built-in flash.  
Note that output level can not be  
adjusted in – – mode.  
Adjust settings for group A.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the flash units in  
group A.  
Adjust settings for group B.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the flash units in  
group B.  
Select the channel.  
Press J.  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Compose the shot.  
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown  
below. Note that the maximum distance at which the remote  
flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.  
60 ° or less  
10 m/33 ft or less  
5 m/15 ft or less  
30 ° or less  
30 ° or less  
Camera (built-in flash)  
5 m/15 ft or less  
60 ° or less  
Wireless remote sensors on flash units should face  
camera.  
7
8
Configure the remote flash units.  
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as  
desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See  
the flash unit instruction manuals for details.  
Raise the built-in flash.  
Press the flash pop-up button to raise the built-in flash. Note  
that even if – – is selected for Built-in flash > Mode, the built-  
in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be  
emitted.  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the  
flash-ready lights for all other flash units are lit, frame the  
photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (0 198) can be used if  
desired.  
A The Flash Sync Mode Display  
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when  
– – is selected for Built-in flash > Mode.  
A Flash Compensation  
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) button and  
sub-command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected  
for the built-in flash, group A, and group B in the Commander mode  
menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when  
a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built-in  
flash > TTL. The Y icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.  
D Commander Mode  
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the  
light from the built-in flash (particular care is required if the camera is  
not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections  
from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode)  
or the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may  
interfere with exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the  
built-in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range,  
choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers) or use  
an optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is  
required for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces  
brighter timing flashes. After positioning the remote flash units, take a  
test shot and view the results in the camera monitor.  
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that  
may be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this  
number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with  
performance.  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure  
compensation is used.  
Option  
Description  
Both flash level and exposure compensation are  
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire  
frame.  
Entire frame  
YE  
E
Exposure compensation applies to background  
only.  
Background only  
e5: Modeling Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If On is selected when the camera is used with the built-in flash  
or an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative  
Lighting system (0 428), a modeling flash will be emitted when  
the camera Pv button is pressed (0 117). No modeling flash is  
emitted if Off is selected.  
e6: Auto Bracketing Set  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing  
(0 133) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both  
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only  
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing,  
WB bracketing (m) to perform white balance bracketing  
(0 139), or ADL bracketing (y) to perform bracketing using  
Active D-Lighting (0 143). Note that white balance bracketing  
is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or  
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &  
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e6 in manual  
exposure mode.  
Option  
Description  
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e6  
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level  
(Custom Setting e6 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture  
(Custom Setting e6 set to AE only) or shutter  
speed, aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting  
e6 set to AE & flash).  
Flash/speed  
F
G
Flash/speed/  
aperture  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e6 set to  
Flash/aperture AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom  
H
I
Setting e6 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e6  
set to AE & flash).  
Flash only  
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control.  
If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not  
used, ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot,  
regardless of the setting selected for auto ISO sensitivity control  
(0 111).  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e8: Bracketing Order  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure,  
flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the order  
described on pages 135 and 140. If Under > MTR > over (I) is  
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the  
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
f: Controls  
f1: D Switch  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to D.  
Option  
Description  
LCD backlight (D) Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.  
D
D and information Control panel backlight illuminates and  
h
display  
shooting information is displayed in monitor.  
f2: Multi Selector Center Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the  
multi selector during viewfinder photography, playback, and  
live view (regardless of the option selected, pressing the center  
of the multi selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts  
movie playback).  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
❚❚ Shooting Mode  
Option  
Select center  
focus point  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Select the center focus point.  
J
Pressing the center of the multi selector selects a  
preset focus point. To choose the point, select it  
and press the center of the multi selector while  
pressing the AF-mode button until the focus  
point flashes. Separate focus points can be  
selected for “wide” (landscape) orientation and  
for each of the two “tall” (portrait) orientations if  
Focus point or Focus point and AF-area mode  
is selected for Custom Setting a9 (Store by  
orientation, 0 312).  
Preset focus  
v
point  
Highlight active  
K
Highlight the active focus point.  
focus point  
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no  
effect in viewfinder photography.  
None  
❚❚ Playback Mode  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail  
playback.  
Thumbnail on/off  
n
o
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,  
View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the  
multi selector is pressed (0 242).  
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback  
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom  
Zoom on/off  
setting from Low magnification (50%), 1 : 1  
(100%), and High magnification (200%). The  
zoom display will center on the active focus point.  
p
u
Choose slot and Display the slot and folder selection dialog  
folder (0 237).  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
❚❚ Live View  
Option  
Select center  
focus point  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live  
view selects the center focus point.  
J
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle  
zoom on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting  
from Low magnification (50%), 1 : 1 (100%),  
and High magnification (200%). The zoom  
display will center on the active focus point.  
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no  
effect in live view.  
Zoom on/off  
p
None  
f3: Multi Selector  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If Restart standby timer is selected, operating the multi  
selector when the standby timer expires (0 34) will activate the  
exposure meters and start the standby timer. If Do nothing is  
selected, the timer will not start when the multi selector is  
pressed.  
f4: Assign Fn Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the Fn button,  
either by itself (Press) or when used in  
combination with the command dials  
(Press + command dials).  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
❚❚ Press  
Selecting Press displays the following options:  
Option  
Description  
During viewfinder photography, you can preview  
depth of field while the Fn button is pressed  
(0 117). During live view photography, you can  
press the button once to open the lens to  
maximum aperture, making it easier to check  
focus; pressing the button again restores  
aperture to its original value (0 41).  
Preview  
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in  
flash and compatible optional flash units only,  
0 198, 430). Press again to cancel FV lock.  
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
FV lock  
r
AE/AF lock  
B
C
AE lock only  
Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed,  
AE lock (Reset on and remains locked until the button is pressed a  
D
release)  
second time, the shutter is released, or the  
standby timer expires.  
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed,  
and remains locked until the button is pressed a  
second time or the standby timer expires.  
AE lock (Hold)  
E
AF lock only  
AF-ON  
Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
F
Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.  
A
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will  
be selected while the Fn button is pressed. If the  
flash is currently enabled, it will instead be  
disabled while the Fn button is pressed.  
IDisable/enable  
z
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option  
Description  
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or  
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet  
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current  
bracketing program will be taken each time the  
Bracketing burst shutter-release button is pressed. If white  
balance bracketing is active or continuous release  
mode (mode U, T or M) is selected, the camera  
will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter-  
release button is held down.  
1
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal,  
or JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the  
control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be  
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn  
button is pressed (the original image quality  
setting will be restored when you remove your  
finger from the shutter-release button). NEF  
+ NEF (RAW)  
4
(RAW) copies are recorded at the settings  
currently selected for NEF (RAW) recording in  
the shooting menu (0 295). To exit without  
recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button  
again.  
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
Center-weighted Center-weighted metering is activated while the  
Matrix metering  
L
M
N
metering  
Fn button is pressed.  
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
Spot metering  
Highlight-  
weighted  
metering  
Highlight-weighted metering is activated while  
the Fn button is pressed.  
4
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option  
Description  
Viewfinder grid Press the Fn button to turn the framing grid  
w
display  
display in the viewfinder on or off (0 6).  
Viewfinder  
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon  
!
virtual horizon display in the viewfinder (0 347).  
Keep the Fn button pressed to take photographs  
Disable  
synchronized  
release  
with the master camera only when using a  
wireless remote controller for remote  
synchronized release.  
x
y
Keep the Fn button pressed to take photographs  
Remote release with the remote cameras only when using a  
only  
wireless remote controller for remote  
synchronized release.  
Pressing the Fn button displays “MY MENU”  
MY MENU  
%
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY  
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a  
frequently-used menu item.  
Access top item  
in MY MENU  
3
Fn button performs same function as K button.  
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other  
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate  
the K button with your left hand.  
Playback  
None  
K
Pressing the button has no effect.  
A Incompatible Options  
If the option selected for Press can not be used in combination with  
the option selected for Press + command dials, a message will be  
displayed and whichever of Press or Press + command dials was  
selected first will be set to None.  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Virtual Horizon  
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for f4 (Assign Fn  
button) > Press, pressing the Fn button displays a pitch and roll  
indicators in the viewfinder. Press the button a second time to return  
to clear the indicators from display.  
Roll  
Camera tilted right  
Camera level  
Camera tilted left  
Pitch  
Camera tilted forward  
Camera level  
Camera tilted back  
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at  
a sharp angle forward or back.  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ Press + Command Dials  
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following  
options:  
Option  
Description  
Press the Fn button  
and rotate a  
command dial to  
choose from pre-  
selected image areas  
Choose image  
area  
i
(0 74). Selecting  
Choose image area  
displays a list of image areas; highlight options  
and press 2 to select or deselect, then press J.  
Press the Fn button and rotate the main  
command dial to lock shutter speed in modes f  
and h; press the Fn button and rotate the sub-  
command dial to lock aperture in modes g and  
h. See page 126 for more information.  
If the Fn button is pressed when the command  
dials are rotated, changes to shutter speed  
(exposure modes f and h) and aperture  
(exposure modes g and h) are made in  
increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option  
selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for  
exposure cntrl, 0 315).  
Shutter spd &  
aperture lock  
$
1 step spd/  
aperture  
v
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to  
choose a lens number specified using the Non-  
CPU lens data option (0 229).  
Choose non-CPU  
lens number  
w
Active  
D-Lighting  
Press the Fn button and rotate the command  
dials to adjust Active D-Lighting (0 182).  
y
Exposure delay Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to  
&
mode  
choose an exposure delay mode (0 322).  
No operation is performed when the command  
dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.  
None  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
f5: Assign Preview Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the Pv button,  
either by itself (Press) or when used in  
combination with the command dials  
(Press + command dials). The options  
available are the same as for Assign Fn  
button (0 343). The default options for  
Press and Press + command dials are  
Preview and None, respectively.  
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/  
AF-L button, either by itself (Press) or  
when used in combination with the  
command dials (Press + command  
dials). The options available are the  
same as for Assign Fn button (0 343),  
except that 1 step spd/aperture and  
Active D-Lighting are not available. The default options for  
Press and Press + command dials are AE/AF lock and None,  
respectively.  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
f7: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks shutter speed at the  
value currently selected in mode f or h. Selecting On for  
Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in  
mode g or h. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available  
in mode e.  
f8: Assign BKT Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the D  
button. If high dynamic range or  
multiple exposure is active while  
another function is assigned to the D  
button, the D button can not be used  
until high dynamic range or multiple  
exposure photography ends.  
Option  
Description  
Press the t button and rotate the command  
dials to choose the bracketing increment and  
number of shots in the bracketing sequence  
Auto bracketing  
t
Press the t button and rotate the command  
Multiple exposure dials to choose the mode and number of shots  
$
for multiple exposures (0 211).  
Press the t button and rotate the command  
dials to choose the mode and the exposure  
differential (0 184).  
HDR (high dynamic  
range)  
2
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
f9: Customize Command Dials  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-  
command dials.  
Option  
Description  
Reverse the direction of rotation  
of the command dials when they  
are used to make adjustments to  
Exposure compensation and/  
or Shutter speed/aperture.  
Highlight options and press 2 to  
Reverse  
rotation  
select or deselect, then press J.  
This setting also applies to the command dials for optional  
MB-D12 multi-power battery packs.  
Exposure setting: If Off is selected, the main command dial  
controls shutter speed and the sub-command dial controls  
aperture. If On is selected, the main command dial will  
control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed.  
If On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be  
used to set aperture in exposure mode g only.  
Autofocus setting: If On is selected, autofocus mode can be  
selected by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and  
rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping  
the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the main  
command dial.  
Change  
main/sub  
These settings also apply to the command dials for the  
MB-D12.  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Option  
Description  
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be  
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main  
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub >  
Exposure setting). If Aperture ring is selected, aperture  
Aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the  
setting camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of  
1 EV (aperture for type G and E lenses is still set using the  
sub-command dial). Note that regardless of the setting  
chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture  
when a non-CPU lens is attached.  
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the  
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight  
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On or On (image  
review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can  
be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame  
playback, move the cursor left or right during thumbnail  
playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or down.  
The sub-command dial is used in full-frame playback to skip  
Menus and  
forward or back according to the option selected for Sub-  
playback  
dial frame advance and in thumbnail playback to page up  
or down. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-  
command dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected  
option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To  
make a selection, press 2, the center of the multi selector, or  
J. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the  
command dials from being used for playback during image  
review.  
When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for  
Menus and playback, the sub-command dial can be  
rotated during full-frame playback to select a folder or to  
skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time.  
Sub-dial  
frame  
advance  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
f10: Release Button to Use Dial  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by  
holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by  
rotating the command dial after the button is released. Setting  
ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires. This  
option is available with the following buttons:  
Button  
I (Q) button  
E button  
M (Y) button  
D button  
Button  
c button  
AF mode button  
Fn button 1  
0
0
134, 139, 143 Pv button 2  
S button  
T button  
A AE-L/AF-L button3  
Movie-record button4  
U button  
1
2
3
4
When assigned Active D-Lighting or exposure delay mode using Custom Setting f4.  
When assigned Active D-Lighting or exposure delay mode using Custom Setting f5.  
When assigned exposure delay mode using Custom Setting f6.  
When assigned white balance or ISO sensitivity using Custom Setting f13.  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
f11: Slot Empty Release Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when  
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be  
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in  
demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release  
button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the  
camera.  
f12: Reverse Indicators  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
If  
is selected, the exposure indicators in the  
control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed  
with negative values on the left and positive values on the right.  
Select  
to display positive values on the left  
and negative values on the right.  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
f13: Assign Movie Record Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the movie-  
record button during viewfinder  
photography and live view  
photography.  
Movie-record button  
❚❚ Press + Command Dials  
Option  
White  
balance  
ISO  
sensitivity  
Description  
Press the button and rotate a command dial to  
choose a white balance option (0 148).  
Press the button and rotate a command dial to  
choose an ISO sensitivity (0 109).  
m
9
Press the button and rotate a command dial to  
choose from pre-selected image areas (0 74).  
Selecting Choose image area displays a list of  
image areas; highlight options and press 2 to  
select or deselect, then press J.  
Chooseimage  
area  
i
Press the button and rotate the main command dial  
to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press the  
button and rotate the sub-command dial to lock  
aperture in modes g and h. See page 126 for more  
information.  
Shutter spd &  
aperture lock  
$
No operation is performed if the command dials  
are rotated while the button is pressed.  
None  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
f14: Live View Button Options  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Select Disable to disable the a button,  
preventing live view from starting  
accidentally.  
f15: Assign MB-D12 AF-ON  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the function assigned  
to the B button on the  
optional MB-D12 battery  
pack.  
Option  
Description  
Pressing the MB-D12 B button initiates  
autofocus.  
Focus locks while the MB-D12 B button is  
pressed.  
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D12 B  
button is pressed.  
Exposure locks while the MB-D12 B button is  
pressed.  
AF-ON  
A
F
AF lock only  
AE/AF lock  
AE lock only  
B
C
Exposure locks when the MB-D12 B button is  
AE lock (Reset pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
on release) pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or the  
standby timer expires.  
D
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Option  
Description  
Exposure locks when the MB-D12 B button is  
AE lock (Hold) pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.  
Press the MB-D12 B button to lock flash value  
E
FV lock  
(built-in flash and compatible optional flash units  
only, 0 198, 430). Press again to cancel FV lock.  
r
G
Same as Fn The MB-D12 B button performs the function  
button selected for Custom Setting f4 (0 343).  
f16: Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the Fn button on the  
wireless remote controller.  
Option  
Description  
During viewfinder photography, you can preview  
depth of field while the Fn button is pressed (0 117).  
During live view photography, you can press the  
button once to open the lens to maximum aperture,  
making it easier to check focus; pressing the button  
again restores aperture to its original value (0 41).  
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash  
and compatible optional flash units only,  
0 198, 430). Press again to cancel FV lock.  
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
Preview  
q
FV lock  
r
B
AE/AF lock  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Option  
Description  
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
C
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and  
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
on release) time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer  
expires.  
D
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
F
AF-ON  
Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.  
A
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be  
selected while the Fn button is pressed. If the flash is  
currently enabled, it will instead be disabled while  
the Fn button is pressed.  
IDisable/  
enable  
z
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or  
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the control  
panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with  
the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed  
(the original image quality setting will be restored  
+ NEF (RAW) when you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button). NEF (RAW) copies are recorded at  
the settings currently selected for NEF (RAW)  
recording in the shooting menu (0 295). To exit  
without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn  
button again.  
4
Live view  
None  
Pressing the Fn button starts and ends live view.  
a
Pressing the button has no effect.  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f17: Lens Focus Function Buttons  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the focus  
function buttons on the lens. The  
buttons can be used for the assigned  
function only when AF-L is selected with  
the focus function selector.  
Focus function buttons  
Focus function selector  
Option  
Description  
AF lock only Focus locks while a focus function button is pressed.  
F
B
Focus and exposure lock while a focus function  
AE/AF lock  
button is pressed.  
Exposure locks while a focus function button is  
pressed.  
AE lock only  
C
Keep a focus function button pressed to select a  
preset focus point (0 342). Release the button to  
restore the original focus point selection.  
Preset focus  
point  
v
Highlight this option and press 2 to select an  
AF-area mode (3D-tracking excluded; 0 90). The  
selected mode will take effect while a focus function  
button is pressed; releasing the button restores the  
original AF-area mode. The lens focus function  
AF-area mode  
K
buttons can not be used to choose the AF-area  
mode during autofocus if 3D-tracking is selected  
using the controls on the camera.  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Option  
Description  
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be  
selected while a focus function button is pressed. If  
the flash is currently enabled, it will instead be  
disabled while a focus function button is pressed.  
Keep any of the focus function buttons pressed to  
take photographs with the master camera only  
when using a wireless remote controller for remote  
synchronized release.  
IDisable/  
enable  
z
x
y
Disable  
synchronized  
release  
Keep any of the focus function buttons pressed to  
take photographs with the remote cameras only  
Remote  
release only when using a wireless remote controller for remote  
synchronized release.  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g: Movie  
g1: Assign Fn Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view.  
❚❚ Press  
Option  
Description  
Aperture widens while the button is pressed. Use  
Power aperture in combination with Custom Setting g2 (Assign  
t
r
(open)  
preview button) > Power aperture (close) for  
button-controlled aperture adjustment (0 362).  
Press the button during movie recording to add an  
Index marking index at the current position (0 54). Indices can be  
used when viewing and editing movies.  
Press the button to display information on shutter  
View photo  
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place  
s
shooting info of movie recording information. Press again to  
return to the movie recording display.  
None  
A Power Aperture  
Pressing the button has no effect.  
Power aperture is not available with some lenses. Power aperture is  
available only in exposure modes g and h and can not be used while  
photo shooting info is displayed (a 6 icon indicates that power  
aperture can not be used).  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
g2: Assign Preview Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the Pv button during movie live view.  
❚❚ Press  
Option  
Description  
Aperture narrows while the button is pressed. Use  
Power aperture in combination with Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn  
q
r
(close)  
button) > Power aperture (open) for button-  
controlled aperture adjustment (0 361).  
Press the button during movie recording to add an  
Index marking index at the current position (0 54). Indices can be  
used when viewing and editing movies.  
Press the button to display information on shutter  
View photo  
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place  
s
shooting info of movie recording information. Press again to  
return to the movie recording display.  
None  
Pressing the button has no effect.  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button during movie  
live view.  
❚❚ Press  
Option  
Description  
Press the button during movie recording to add an  
Index marking index at the current position (0 54). Indices can be  
used when viewing and editing movies.  
r
Press the button to display information on shutter  
View photo  
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place  
s
shooting info of movie recording information. Press again to  
return to the movie recording display.  
Focus and exposure lock while the button is  
pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
B
C
AE lock only  
Exposure locks while the button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the button is pressed, and  
AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a  
E
F
second time.  
AF lock only  
None  
Focus locks while the button is pressed.  
Pressing the button has no effect.  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
g4: Assign Shutter Button  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Choose the role played by pressing the shutter-release button  
when 1 is selected with the live view selector.  
Option  
Description  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down  
to end movie recording and take a photograph  
with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (for information on  
image size, see page 60).  
Take photos  
C
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start  
movie live view. You can then press the shutter-  
release button halfway to focus (autofocus mode  
only) and press it all the way down to start or end  
recording. The shutter-release button can not be  
Record movies used for other purposes during movie live view. To  
end movie live view, press the a button. The  
shutter-release button on an optional wireless  
remote controller or remote cord (0 439, 441)  
functions in the same way as the camera shutter-  
release button.  
1
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Setup Menu Options  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Format memory card  
Monitor brightness  
Monitor color balance  
Clean image sensor  
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date  
Language  
Auto image rotation  
Battery info  
0
Option  
Image comment  
0
Copyright information  
Save/load settings  
Virtual horizon  
Non-CPU lens data  
AF fine-tune  
HDMI  
Location data  
Network  
Eye-Fi upload 2  
Firmware version  
1
Not available when battery is low.  
2
Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted.  
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 279.  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Format Memory Card  
G button B setup menu  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being  
used or formatted in other devices. Note that formatting  
permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card. Before  
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required (0 253).  
D During Formatting  
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.  
Selecting Format memory card in the  
setup menu displays the options shown  
at right; choose a memory card slot and  
select Yes to format the selected card.  
Memory cards can also be formatted by holding the O (Q) and  
I (Q) buttons down simultaneously until a flashing C  
appears in the shutter-speed displays in the control panel and  
viewfinder.  
O (Q) button  
I (Q) button  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Press the buttons together again a second time to format the  
card (to exit without formatting the card, press any other button  
or wait for about six seconds until C stops flashing). When  
formatting is complete, the control panel and viewfinder will  
show the number of photographs that can be recorded at  
current settings.  
A Two Memory Cards  
If two memory cards are inserted when the O (Q) and I (Q)  
buttons are pressed, the card to be formatted will be shown by a  
flashing icon. Rotate the main command dial to choose a different slot.  
Monitor Brightness  
G button B setup menu  
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness for playback, menus,  
and the information display. Choose higher values for increased  
brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.  
A Monitor Brightness  
Values of +4 or higher make the monitor easier to read in bright light  
but also result in yellow colors taking on a greenish cast. Choose lower  
values for accurate color reproduction.  
A See Also  
The option selected for Monitor brightness has no effect on the  
brightness of the display during live view photography or movie live  
view. For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see  
page 42.  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monitor Color Balance  
G button B setup menu  
Use the multi selector as shown below  
to adjust monitor color balance with  
reference to a sample image. The  
sample image is the last photograph  
taken or, in playback mode, the last  
photograph displayed; to choose a  
different image, press the W button  
and select an image from a thumbnail  
list (to view the highlighted image full  
frame, press and hold X; to view images  
in other locations, press W and select  
the desired card and folder as described  
on page 237). If the memory card  
contains no photographs, an empty frame with a gray border  
will be displayed in place of the sample image. Press J to exit  
when adjustments are complete. Monitor color balance applies  
only to menus, playback, and the view through the lens  
displayed during live view photography and movie live view;  
pictures taken with the camera are not affected.  
Increase amount of green  
Increase amount of blue  
Increase amount of amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
G button B setup menu  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in  
Capture NX-D (available for download, 0 260; for more  
information, refer to Capture NX-D on-line help).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is  
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at  
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all  
the way in.  
1
Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J. To exit without  
acquiring image dust off data, press  
G.  
Start: The message shown at right  
will be displayed and “F” will  
appear in the viewfinder and  
control panel displays.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this  
option to clean the image sensor  
before starting. The message  
shown at right will be displayed and  
F” will appear in the viewfinder  
and control panel displays when  
cleaning is complete.  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image  
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start  
only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing  
photographs.  
2
3
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-  
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;  
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
Acquire dust off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off  
when the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or  
too dark, the camera may be unable  
to acquire Image Dust Off reference  
data and the message shown at right  
will be displayed. Choose another  
reference object and repeat the  
process from Step 1.  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for  
photographs taken with different lenses or  
at different apertures. Reference images  
can not be viewed using computer imaging  
software. A grid pattern is displayed when  
reference images are viewed on the  
camera.  
Flicker Reduction  
G button B setup menu  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or  
mercury-vapor lighting during live view or movie recording.  
Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the  
correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of  
the local AC power supply.  
D Flicker Reduction  
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the  
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options  
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction  
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in  
which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher  
f-number). To prevent flicker, select mode  
speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1  
or 1 30 s for 60 Hz; 1 50 s, or 1  
25 s for 50 Hz.  
h
and choose a shutter  
/
125 s, 1  
60 s,  
/
/
/
100 s, 1  
/
/
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Time Zone and Date  
G button B setup menu  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date  
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off (0 18).  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically  
set to the time in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Date and time Set the camera clock.  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are  
displayed.  
Date format  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock  
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.  
The default setting is Off.  
Daylight saving  
time  
If the clock is reset, a B icon will flash in the control panel and  
a flashing T indicator will appear in the information display.  
Language  
G button B setup menu  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.  
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Auto Image Rotation  
G button B setup menu  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on  
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically  
during playback (0 288) or when viewed in ViewNX 2 (supplied)  
or in Capture NX-D (available for download; 0 260). The  
following orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90 °  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90 °  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.  
Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with  
the lens pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for  
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the  
playback menu (0 288).  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Battery Info  
G button B setup menu  
View information on the battery  
currently inserted in the camera.  
Item  
Description  
Charge  
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.  
The number of times the shutter has been released with  
the current battery since the battery was last charged.  
No. of shots Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter  
without recording a photograph, for example when  
measuring preset manual white balance.  
This item is displayed only when the camera is powered  
by an optional MB-D12 battery pack equipped with an  
EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 (available separately).  
Calibration j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is  
required to ensure that battery level can be measured  
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging.  
: Calibration not required.  
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates  
that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the  
battery has reached the end of its charging life and should  
be replaced. Note that fresh batteries charged at  
temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a  
Battery age  
temporary drop in charging life; the battery age display will  
however return to normal once the battery has been  
recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The MB-D12 Battery Pack  
The display for the MB-D12 is shown at  
right. In the case of EN-EL18a/EN-EL18  
batteries, the display shows whether  
calibration is required. If AA batteries are  
used, the battery level will be shown by a  
battery level icon; other items will not be  
displayed.  
Image Comment  
G button B setup menu  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.  
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or  
Capture NX-D (available for download; 0 260). The comment is  
also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0 244). The following options are available:  
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 178.  
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.  
Attach comment: Select this option to  
attach the comment to all subsequent  
photographs. Attach comment can  
be turned on and off by highlighting it  
and pressing 2. After choosing the  
desired setting, press J to exit.  
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copyright Information  
G button B setup menu  
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are  
taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data  
shown in the photo information display (0 245) and can be  
viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX-D  
(available for download; 0 260). The following options are  
available:  
Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 178.  
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.  
Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as  
described on page 178. Copyright holder names can be up to  
54 characters long.  
Attach copyright information: Select  
this option to attach copyright  
information to all subsequent  
photographs. Attach copyright  
information can be turned on and off  
by highlighting it and pressing 2.  
After choosing the desired setting,  
press J to exit.  
D Copyright Information  
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,  
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that  
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or  
transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept  
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the  
Copyright information option.  
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Save/Load Settings  
G button B setup menu  
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the  
memory card, or to the memory card in the primary card slot if  
two memory cards are inserted (0 86; if the card is full, an error  
will be displayed). Use this option to share settings among D810  
cameras.  
Menu  
Option  
Playback display options  
Image review  
After delete  
Playback  
Rotate tall  
Shooting menu bank  
Extended menu banks  
File naming  
Primary slot selection  
Secondary slot function  
Image quality  
JPEG/TIFF recording  
NEF (RAW) recording  
Image area  
Shooting  
(all banks)  
White balance (with fine-tuning and presets d-1–d-6)  
Set Picture Control (Custom Picture Controls are saved as Standard)  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Vignette control  
Auto distortion control  
Long exposure NR  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu  
Option  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Movie settings  
Shooting  
(all banks)  
Custom settings  
(all banks)  
All Custom Settings  
Clean image sensor  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)  
Language  
Auto image rotation  
Image comment  
Copyright information  
Non-CPU lens data  
HDMI  
Setup  
Location data  
Eye-Fi upload  
All My Menu items  
All recent settings  
Choose tab  
My Menu/  
Recent Settings  
Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by  
selecting Load settings. Note that Save/load settings is only  
available when a memory card is inserted in the camera, and  
that the Load settings option is only available if the card  
contains saved settings.  
A Saved Settings  
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUPF. The camera will not be  
able to load settings if the file name is changed.  
378  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Virtual Horizon  
G button B setup menu  
Display roll and pitch information based on information from  
the camera tilt sensor. If the camera is tilted neither left nor  
right, the roll reference line will turn green, while if the camera is  
tilted neither forward nor back, the dot in the center of the  
display will turn green. Each division is equivalent to about 5 °.  
Camera level  
Camera tilted left or  
right  
Camera tilted forward  
or back  
D Tilting the Camera  
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at  
a sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt,  
the amount of tilt will not be displayed.  
A See Also  
For information on viewing a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder,  
see Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button > Press; 0 343, 347). For  
information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see pages 46  
and 58.  
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AF Fine-Tune  
G button B setup menu  
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not  
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal  
focus; use only when required.  
Option  
Description  
AF fine-tune On: Turn AF tuning on.  
(On/Off) Off: Turn AF tuning off.  
Tune AF for the current lens  
(CPU lenses only). Press 1  
or 3 to choose a value  
between +20 and –20.  
Values for up to 20 lens  
types can be stored. Only  
one value can be stored for  
each type of lens.  
Move focal point  
away from  
camera.  
Current  
value  
Saved value  
Choose the AF tuning value  
used when no previously  
Default saved value exists for the  
current lens (CPU lenses  
only).  
Move focal  
point toward  
camera.  
Previous  
value  
380  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Option  
Description  
List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens  
from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O (Q). To  
change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an  
identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens  
serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the  
same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used  
with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens  
and press 2.  
List saved  
values  
The menu shown at right will be  
displayed; press 1 or 3 to  
choose an identifier and press  
J to save changes and exit.  
D AF Tuning  
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity  
when AF tuning is applied.  
D Live View  
Tuning is not applied to autofocus during live view (0 35).  
A Saved Value  
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is  
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and  
teleconverter.  
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eye-Fi Upload  
G button B setup menu  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card  
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the  
camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected  
destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal  
strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose  
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a  
warning is displayed in the monitor (0 470), turn the camera off and  
remove the card.  
Set Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 319) to 30 s or more when  
using an Eye-Fi card.  
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries  
to the manufacturer. The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on  
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.  
382  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status  
is indicated by an icon in the information  
display:  
d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no  
pictures available for upload.  
f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled;  
waiting to begin upload.  
f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a flashing  
W appears in the control panel or viewfinder, refer to page  
470; if this indicator is not flashing, pictures can be taken  
normally but you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.  
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards  
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult  
the manufacturer for more information. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in  
the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been  
updated to the latest version.  
Firmware Version  
G button B setup menu  
View the current camera firmware version.  
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N  
(retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
Retouch Menu Options  
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or  
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only  
displayed when a memory card containing photographs other  
than small NEF (RAW) images is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
D-Lighting  
0
Option  
Straighten  
0
i
j
k
Z
a
b
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
Color balance  
Image overlay 1  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Resize  
Color outline  
Color sketch  
l
c
d
m
Perspective control  
Miniature effect  
Selective color  
Edit movie  
n
o
7
8
Y
e
f
g
9
Quick retouch  
Side-by-side comparison 2 412  
p
1
2
Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.  
Available only if bbutton is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original  
is displayed.  
384  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1
Select an item in the retouch menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2  
to select.  
2
Select a picture.  
Highlight a picture and press J. To  
view the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button.  
To view images in other locations,  
press W and select the desired card  
and folder as described on page 237.  
A Retouch  
In the case of images recorded at image quality settings of NEF +  
JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. The camera  
may not be able to display or retouch images created with other  
devices.  
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the selected item.  
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.  
A Monitor off Delay  
The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no  
actions are performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will  
be lost. To increase the time the monitor remains on, choose a  
longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off  
delay, 0 320).  
Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy.  
Retouched copies are indicated by a  
N icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback  
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.  
Display picture full  
frame and press b.  
Highlight an option  
Create retouched  
copy.  
and press J.  
386  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Small NEF (RAW) + JPEG Images  
If the JPEG copies of small NEF (RAW) images taken at image quality  
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are recorded to the same memory card  
(0 86), neither the NEF (RAW) images nor the JPEG copies can be  
edited.  
D Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch  
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and  
Edit movie > Choose start/end point each option can be applied  
only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options  
that can not be applied to the current image can not be selected.  
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF  
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are  
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF  
(RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies  
created from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images  
of the same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used  
when copies are saved in JPEG format.  
387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-Lighting  
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit  
photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of  
correction performed. The effect can be  
previewed in the edit display. Press J to  
save the retouched copy.  
388  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Red-Eye Correction  
G button N retouch menu  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash and is  
available only with photographs taken using a flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in  
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that  
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results  
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the  
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview  
thoroughly before proceeding.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in, W to zoom out. While  
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector to view  
areas of image not visible in monitor. Keep  
multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other  
areas of frame. Navigation window is  
displayed when zoom buttons or multi  
selector are pressed; area currently visible in  
monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J  
to cancel zoom.  
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected  
photograph, a copy will be created that has  
been processed to reduce its effects. No copy  
will be created if the camera is unable to  
detect red-eye.  
Zoom in  
X
Zoom out  
W
View other areas  
of image  
Cancel zoom  
J
J
Create copy  
389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trim  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a cropped copy of the selected  
photograph. The selected photograph  
is displayed with the selected crop  
shown in yellow; create a cropped copy  
as described in the following table.  
To  
Reduce size of  
crop  
Use  
Description  
Press W to reduce the size of the crop.  
W
Increase size of  
crop  
Press X to increase the size of the crop.  
X
Change crop  
aspect ratio  
Rotate the main command dial to choose the  
aspect ratio.  
Use multi selector to position the crop. Press  
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the  
desired position.  
Position crop  
Press center of multi selector to preview  
cropped image.  
Preview crop  
Create copy  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
J
390  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF  
(RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an  
image quality (0 79) of JPEG fine; cropped  
copies created from JPEG photos have the  
same image quality as the original. The size  
of the copy varies with crop size and aspect  
ratio and appears at upper left in the crop  
display.  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are  
displayed.  
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monochrome  
G button N retouch menu  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,  
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white  
monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays  
a preview of the selected image; press 1  
to increase color saturation, 3 to  
decrease. Press J to create a  
Increase saturation  
Decrease saturation  
monochrome copy.  
392  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Filter Effects  
G button N retouch menu  
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter  
effects as described below, press J to save the retouched copy.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight  
filter, makingthe picture lessblue.  
The effect can be previewed in  
the monitor as shown at right.  
Creates a copy with warm tone  
filter effects, giving the copy a  
“warm” red cast. The effect can be  
previewed in the monitor.  
Skylight  
Warm filter  
Red  
Intensify reds (Red intensifier),  
intensifier greens (Green intensifier), or  
blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1  
to increase the effect, 3 to  
decrease.  
Green  
intensifier  
Blue  
intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light  
sources.  
Number of points: Choose from  
four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the  
Cross  
screen  
brightness of the light sources  
affected.  
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X to preview  
the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Option  
Soft  
Description  
Add a soft filter effect. Press 4 or  
2 to choose the filter strength.  
Color Balance  
G button N retouch menu  
Use the multi selector to create a copy  
with modified color balance as shown  
below. The effect is displayed in the  
monitor together with red, green, and  
blue histograms (0 241) giving the  
distribution of tones in the copy. Press J  
to save the retouched copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Increase amount of blue  
Increase amount of amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
394  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the  
monitor, press X. The histogram will be  
updated to show data only for the portion  
of the image displayed in the monitor.  
While the image is zoomed in, press  
L (Z/Q) to toggle back and forth  
between color balance and zoom. When  
zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with the X and W buttons  
and scroll the image with the multi selector.  
Image Overlay  
G button N retouch menu  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to  
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;  
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image  
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image  
quality and size (0 79, 83; all options are available). To create a  
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW) and an  
image size of Large (the overlay will be saved as a large NEF/  
RAW image even if Small is selected).  
+
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the  
retouch menu and press 2. The  
dialog shown at right will be  
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted;  
press J to display a picture selection  
dialog listing only large NEF (RAW)  
images created with this camera (small NEF/RAW images can  
not be selected).  
Select the first image.  
Use the multi selector to highlight  
the first photograph in the overlay.  
To view the highlighted photograph  
full frame, press and hold the X  
button. To view images in other  
locations, press W and select the  
desired card and folder as described on page 237. Press J to  
select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview  
display.  
3
Select the second image.  
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight  
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as  
described in Step 2.  
396  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
5
6
Adjust gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and  
optimize exposure for the overlay by  
pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain  
from values between 0.1 and 2.0.  
Repeat for the second image. The  
default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve  
gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the  
Preview column.  
Preview the overlay.  
Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in  
the Preview column and press 1 or  
3 to highlight Overlay. Press J to  
preview the overlay as shown at right  
(to save the overlay without  
displaying a preview, select Save). To  
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press  
W.  
Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is  
displayed to save the overlay. After  
an overlay is created, the resulting  
image will be displayed full-frame in  
the monitor.  
397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Image Overlay  
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth  
can be combined.  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,  
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure  
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for  
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for  
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay  
when it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied.  
Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for  
NEF (RAW) compression in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have  
the same bit depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved  
using size-priority compression.  
398  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select NEF (RAW) processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in  
the retouch menu and press 2 to  
display a picture selection dialog  
listing only large NEF (RAW) images  
created with this camera. Small NEF/  
RAW images can not be selected; to  
create JPEG copies of small NEF (RAW) images, use the  
supplied ViewNX 2 software (0 253) or Capture NX-D  
(available for download; 0 260).  
2
Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a  
photograph (to view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button; to view images in  
other locations as described on page  
237, press W). Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.  
399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Choose settings for the JPEG copy.  
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and  
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or  
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure  
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and  
+2 EV.  
Image quality (0 79)  
Image size (0 83)  
White balance (0 148)  
Exposure compensation (0 130)  
Set Picture Control (0 170)  
High ISO NR (0 299)  
Color space (0 296)  
Vignette control (0 297)  
D-Lighting (0 388)  
4
Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to create a  
JPEG copy of the selected  
photograph. To exit without copying  
the photograph, press the G  
button.  
400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resize  
Create small copies of selected photographs.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select Resize.  
To resize selected images, highlight  
Resize in the retouch menu and  
press 2.  
2
Choose a destination.  
If two memory cards are inserted, you  
can choose a destination for the  
resized copies by highlighting  
Choose destination and pressing 2  
(if only one memory card is inserted,  
proceed to Step 3).  
The menu shown at right will be  
displayed; highlight a card slot and  
press J.  
401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and press 2.  
The options shown at right will be  
displayed; highlight an option and  
press J.  
Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
Highlight pictures and press the  
center of the multi selector to select  
or deselect (to view the highlighted  
picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button; to view pictures in other  
locations as described on page 237,  
press W). Selected pictures are  
marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete.  
Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4  
(0 75) can not be resized.  
402  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed. Highlight Yes and press J  
to save the resized copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are  
displayed.  
A Image Quality  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB)  
photos have an image quality (0 79) of JPEG fine; copies created from  
JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.  
403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Retouch  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies with enhanced saturation  
and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as  
required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of  
enhancement. The effect can be  
previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched  
copy.  
Straighten  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a straightened copy of the  
selected image. Press 2 to rotate the  
image clockwise by up to five degrees in  
increments of approximately 0.25  
degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise  
(the effect can be previewed in the edit  
display; note that edges of the image  
will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J to save the  
retouched copy.  
404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Distortion Control  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies with reduced peripheral  
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera  
correct distortion automatically and  
then make fine adjustments using the  
multi selector, or select Manual to  
reduce distortion manually (note that  
Auto is not available with photos taken  
using auto distortion control; see page 298). Press 2 to reduce  
barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion (the effect  
can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater amounts  
of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped  
out). Press J to save the retouched copy. Note that distortion  
control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created  
from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other  
than DX (24×16).  
A Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses  
(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded). Results are not  
guaranteed with other lenses.  
405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fisheye  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies that appear to have been  
taken with a fisheye lens. Press 2 to  
increase the effect (this also increases  
the amount that will be cropped out at  
the edges of the image), 4 to reduce it.  
The effect can be previewed in the edit  
display. Press J to save the retouched  
copy.  
Color Outline  
G button N retouch menu  
Create an outline copy of a photograph  
to use as a base for painting. The effect  
can be previewed in the edit display.  
Press J to save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
406  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Color Sketch  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a copy of a photograph that  
resembles a sketch made with colored  
pencils. Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or 2  
to change. Vividness can be increased  
to make colors more saturated, or  
decreased for a washed-out,  
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or  
thinner. Thicker outlines makes colors more saturated. The  
results can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the  
retouched copy.  
407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Perspective Control  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies that reduce the effects of  
perspective taken from the base of a tall  
object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts  
of perspective control result in more of  
the edges being cropped out). The  
results can be previewed in the edit  
display. Press J to save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
408  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Miniature Effect  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works  
best with photos taken from a high vantage point. The area that  
will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.  
To  
Choose  
orientation  
Press  
Description  
Press W to choose orientation of area that is in  
focus.  
W
If area of effect is in  
wide orientation,  
press 1 or 3 to  
position frame  
showing area of copy  
that will be in focus.  
Choose position  
Area in focus  
If area of effect is in  
tall orientation, press  
4 or 2 to position  
frame showing area  
of copy that will be in  
focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4  
or 2 to choose height.  
Choose size  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or  
3 to choose width.  
Preview copy  
Create copy  
Preview copy.  
Create copy.  
X
J
409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selective Color  
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select Selective color.  
Highlight Selective color in the  
retouch menu and press 2 to display  
a picture selection dialog.  
2
Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a  
photograph (to view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button; to view images in  
other locations as described on page  
237, press W). Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.  
3
Select a color.  
Use the multi selector to position the  
cursor over an object and press  
Selected color  
center of multi selector to select the  
color of the object as one that will  
remain in the final copy (the camera  
may have difficulty detecting  
unsaturated colors; choose a  
saturated color). To zoom in on the picture for precise color  
selection, press X. Press W to zoom out.  
410  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Highlight the color range.  
Rotatethe main command  
dial to highlight the color  
range for the selected  
color.  
Color range  
Choose the color range.  
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease  
the range of similar hues that will be  
included in the final photograph.  
Choose from values between 1 and 7;  
note that higher values may include  
hues from other colors. The effect  
can be previewed in the edit display.  
6
Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors,  
rotate the main command  
dial to highlight another  
of the three color boxes at  
the top of the display and  
repeat Steps 3–5 to select  
another color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect  
the highlighted color, press O (Q); to remove all colors, press  
and hold O (Q). A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
select Yes.  
411  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Save the edited copy.  
Press J to save the retouched copy.  
Side-by-Side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This  
option is only available if the b button is pressed to display the  
retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame.  
1
Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy (shown by a  
N icon) or a photograph that has  
been retouched in full-frame  
playback and press b.  
b button  
2
Select Side-by-side comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side comparison  
and press J.  
412  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Compare the copy with the original.  
The source image is displayed on the  
left, the retouched copy on the right,  
with the options used to create the  
copy listed at the top of the display.  
Press 4 or 2 to switch between the  
source image and the retouched  
copy. To view the highlighted picture  
full frame, press and hold the X  
Options used to create  
copy  
Source  
image  
Retouched  
copy  
button. If the copy was created from  
two source images using Image  
overlay, or if the source has been copied multiple times,  
press 1 or 3 to view the other source image. To exit to  
playback, press the K button, or press J to exit to playback  
with the highlighted image selected.  
D Side-by-Side Comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a  
photograph that was protected (0 250) or has since been deleted or  
hidden (0 281).  
413  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O My Menu/m Recent Settings  
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.  
G button  
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a  
customized list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom  
Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20  
items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My  
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described  
below.  
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu  
1
Select Add items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items  
and press 2.  
2
Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the menu  
containing the option you wish to  
add and press 2.  
414  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
4
5
Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu item and  
press J.  
Position the new item.  
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item  
up or down in My Menu. Press J to  
add the new item.  
Add more items.  
The items currently displayed in My  
Menu are indicated by a check mark.  
Items indicated by a V icon can not  
be selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to  
select additional items.  
415  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu  
1
2
Select Remove items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.  
Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2 to select  
or deselect. Selected items are  
indicated by a check mark.  
3
Delete the selected items.  
Press J. A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed; press J again to delete  
the selected items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O (Q)  
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to  
remove the selected item from My Menu.  
416  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu  
1
2
Select Rank items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.  
Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to move  
and press J.  
3
4
Position the item.  
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or  
down in My Menu and press J.  
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition  
additional items.  
Exit to My Menu.  
Press the G button to return to My  
Menu.  
G button  
417  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recent Settings  
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select  
m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab.  
1
Select Choose tab.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Choose  
tab and press 2.  
2
Select m RECENT SETTINGS.  
Highlight m RECENT SETTINGS and  
press J. The name of the menu will  
change from “MY MENU” to “RECENT  
SETTINGS.”  
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu  
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for  
m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and  
press the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press  
O (Q) again to delete the selected item.  
418  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Technical Notes  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,  
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error  
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the  
camera.  
Compatible Lenses  
Camera setting  
Exposure  
mode  
Focus mode  
Metering system  
M (with  
electronic  
rangefinder)1  
L2  
e
f
g
h
M3  
AF  
45  
N4  
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
Type G, E, or D AF  
NIKKOR 7  
8
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series 9  
PC Micro 85mm  
f/2.8D 11  
10  
10  
10  
10  
8,10  
10  
12  
8,10  
AF-S / AF-I  
8
Teleconverter 13  
Other AF NIKKOR  
(except lenses for  
F3AF)  
14  
14  
8
8
15  
AI-P NIKKOR  
419  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Camera setting  
Exposure  
mode  
Focus mode  
Metering system  
M (with  
electronic  
rangefinder)1  
L2  
e
f
g
h
M3  
AF  
45  
N4  
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
AI-, AI-modified  
NIKKOR or Nikon  
Series E lenses 17  
Medical-NIKKOR  
120mm f/4  
Reflex-NIKKOR  
PC-NIKKOR  
15  
18  
19  
20  
21  
18  
22  
20  
10  
AI-type  
24  
18  
26  
19  
20  
Teleconverter 23  
PB-6 Bellows  
Focusing  
24  
Attachment 25  
Autoextensionrings  
(PK-series 11A, 12,  
or 13; PN-11)  
24  
18  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Manual focus available with all lenses.  
Matrix.  
Center-weighted.  
Spot.  
Highlight-weighted.  
IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 114).  
The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the  
lens is revolved. This can be prevented by installing a smaller tilt knob; contact a Nikon-  
authorized service representative for more information.  
10 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
11 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when  
shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is  
used.  
420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12 Manual exposure mode only.  
13 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 423). For information on the focus points  
available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 423.  
14 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF  
28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at maximum zoom, in-focus  
indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust  
focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.  
15 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
16 Some lenses can not be used (see page 424).  
17 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters  
can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.  
18 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 229), aperture value  
will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.  
19 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU  
lens data (0 229). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not  
achieved.  
20 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non-CPU  
lens data (0 229).  
21 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one  
step or more.  
22 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode,  
preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens. In  
manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure  
before shifting lens.  
23 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–105mm  
f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.  
24 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
25 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required depending on camera  
orientation.  
26 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture using focusing  
attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph.  
421  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO  
sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at  
high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted during movie  
recording or live view photography.  
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses  
CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note  
that IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by  
the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the  
lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture  
ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G/E lens  
Type D lens  
422  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter  
The table below shows the focus points available for autofocus and  
electronic rangefinding when an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is attached.  
Note that the camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast  
subjects if the combined aperture is slower than f/5.6. Autofocus is not  
available when teleconverters are used with the AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor  
105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.  
Accessory  
Maximum aperture of lens  
Focus points  
f/4 or faster  
TC-14E, TC-14E II,  
TC-14E III  
1
1
f/5.6  
f/2.8 or faster  
TC-17E II  
f/4  
2
f/5.6  
f/2.8 or faster  
TC-20E, TC-20E II,  
TC-20E III  
3
1
f/4  
2
f/5.6  
f/5.6  
TC-800-1.25E ED  
1
Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode  
(0 90).  
2
3
Autofocus not available.  
Focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are obtained from line sensors.  
423  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Lens f-number  
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the  
lens.  
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lens data (0 229) can be used to enable many of the  
features available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if  
no data are provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place  
of color matrix metering, while if the maximum aperture is not  
provided, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops  
from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read  
off the lens aperture ring.  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following can NOT be used with the D810:  
TC-16A AF teleconverter  
Non-AI lenses  
Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit  
(400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,  
1200mm f/11)  
AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm  
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,  
AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or  
earlier)  
Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm  
f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–  
906200)  
2.1cm f/4  
Extension Ring K2  
180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers  
174041–174180)  
PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
142361–143000)  
360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers  
174031–174127)  
Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
200111–200310)  
200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers  
280001–300490)  
424  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D AF-Assist Illumination  
Some lenses may block the illuminator at certain focus distances.  
Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator. More information on  
lenses that can be used with the AF-assist illuminator may be found on  
A The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of  
24 mm (16 mm in DX format) to 300 mm, although in some cases the  
flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or  
focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block  
the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with  
red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash  
has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro  
range of macro zoom lenses. The following illustrations show the  
effect of vignetting caused by shadows cast by the lens when the flash  
is used.  
Shadow  
Vignetting  
More information on lenses that can be used with the built-in flash  
may be found on page 494.  
425  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Calculating Angle of View  
The D810 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm (135) format  
cameras. If Auto DX crop is on (0 75) and a 35 mm format lens is  
attached, the angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film  
(35.9 × 24.0 mm); if a DX lens is attached, the angle of view will  
automatically be adjusted to 23.4 × 15.6 mm (DX format).  
To choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens, turn  
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),  
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35 mm format lens is attached, the  
angle of view could be reduced by 1.5× by selecting DX (24×16) or by  
1.2× by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect  
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).  
FX (36×24) picture size (35.9 × 24.0 mm,  
equivalent to 35 mm format)  
1.2× (30×20) picture size  
(30.0 × 19.9 mm)  
DX (24×16) picture size (23.4 × 15.6 mm,  
equivalent to DX format camera)  
5 : 4 (30×24) picture size  
Lens  
(30.0 × 24.0 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Angle of view (FX (36×24); 35 mm format)  
Angle of view (1.2× (30×20))  
Angle of view (DX (24×16); DX format)  
Angle of view (5 : 4 (30×24))  
426  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Calculating Angle of View (Continued)  
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the  
35 mm format angle of view, while the 1.2× (30×20) angle of view is  
about 1.2 times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) angle of view is about  
1.1 times smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35 mm  
format when DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the  
lens by about 1.5, by about 1.2 when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or by  
about 1.1 when 5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective  
focal length of a 50 mm lens in 35 mm format would be 75 mm when  
DX (24×16) is selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or  
55 mm when 5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).  
427  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in  
flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers  
improved communication between the camera and compatible  
flash units for improved flash photography.  
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash  
units:  
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, SB-300, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
ISO 100 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 18/59 10/33  
Guide No. 4  
ISO 200 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 25/82 14/46  
1
If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or N(flash) is selected  
for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance  
appropriately.  
2
3
Wireless flash control is not available.  
Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-910, SB-900,  
SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.  
m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;  
SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.  
4
428  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-  
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander  
for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200  
flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not  
equipped with a flash.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide  
Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide  
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture  
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters  
(or in feet, 111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold  
increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square  
root of two (approximately 1.4).  
A The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync  
terminal as required. Do not connect  
another flash unit via a sync cable when  
performing rear-curtain sync flash  
photography with a flash unit mounted on  
the camera accessory shoe.  
429  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash  
units:  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
digital SLR1  
i-TTL  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital  
SLR  
z2  
z2  
AA Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
GN Distance-priority manual  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
Remote flash control  
i-TTL i-TTL  
z3  
z3  
z
z
z
z
z
z6  
z
z
z
z
z
z6  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A
M
z4 z4  
z5  
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control  
AA Auto aperture  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
i-TTL i-TTL  
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control  
AA Auto aperture  
z
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
430  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Color Information Communication  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync7  
FV lock 8  
AF-assist for multi-area AF  
Red-eye reduction  
Camera modeling illumination  
Camera flash mode selection  
Camera flash unit firmware update  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z9  
z
z
z
z10  
1
2
3
Not available with spot metering.  
Can also be selected with flash unit.  
AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. Unless lens data have  
been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu, “A” will be  
selected when a non-CPU lens is used.  
4
5
6
Can only be selected with camera.  
Available only during close-up photography.  
Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup  
menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash  
unit.  
7
8
9
Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.  
Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes.  
Available only in commander mode.  
10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.  
431  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and  
manual modes.  
Flash unit SB-80DX,  
SB-28DX,  
SB-30, SB-27 1,  
SB-22S, SB-22,  
SB-20, SB-16B,  
SB-23, SB-29 2,  
SB-21B 2,  
SB-29S 2  
SB-50DX  
SB-28, SB-26,  
SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
A
SB-15  
Non-TTL auto  
M
G
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Rear-curtain  
sync 3  
REAR  
1
2
3
Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-  
TTL auto flash).  
Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR  
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
432  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit  
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR  
cameras. The D810 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 64 and  
12800. At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos  
taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower  
value. At values under 64 or over 12800, the desired results may not be  
achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready  
indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in  
i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the  
photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only;  
for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other  
units, see the manual provided with the flash).  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash  
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.  
We recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test  
shot and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash  
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may  
produce incorrect exposure.  
433  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-  
eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and  
SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:  
SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available when  
17–135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points  
shown at right.  
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist  
illumination is available when 24–105 mm  
24–34 mm  
AF lenses are used with the focus points  
shown at right.  
35–49 mm  
50–105 mm  
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available when 24–  
135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points shown  
at right.  
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator  
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera  
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.  
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is  
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
64  
3.3  
100  
4
200  
4.8  
400  
5.6  
800  
6.7  
1600 3200 6400 12800  
9.5 11 13  
8
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the  
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
434  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Flash Control Mode  
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional  
flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows:  
Flash sync  
Auto FP (0 330)  
i-TTL  
Auto aperture (AA)  
Non-TTL auto flash (A)  
Distance-priority manual (GN)  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Advanced wireless lighting  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V  
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal  
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before  
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-  
authorized service representative for more information.  
435  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available  
for the D810.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15 (0 13, 14): Additional  
EN-EL15 batteries are available from local retailers and  
Nikon-authorized service representatives.  
Battery Charger MH-25a (0 13): The MH-25a can be used  
to recharge EN-EL15 batteries. MH-25 battery chargers  
can also be used.  
Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D12: The MB-D12 is equipped  
with a shutter-release button, B button, multi  
selector, and main- and sub-command dials for  
improved operation when taking photographs in  
portrait (tall) orientation. When attaching the MB-D12,  
remove the camera MB-D12 contact cover. A BL-5  
battery-chamber cover and an MH-26a or MH-26  
Power sources  
battery charger are required when using EN-EL18a and  
EN-EL18 batteries.  
Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories  
can be used to power the camera for extended periods  
(EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). The  
EP-5B is required to connect the camera to the EH-5b;  
see page 442 for details. Note that when the camera is  
used with an MB-D12, the EP-5B must be inserted into  
the MB-D12, not the camera. Do not attempt to use the  
camera with power connectors inserted into both the  
camera and MB-D12.  
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the  
Body caps  
mirror, viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust  
when a lens is not in place.  
Accessory shoe Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1: A cover protecting the accessory  
covers shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.  
436  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Communication Unit UT-1: Use a USB cable to connect the  
UT-1 to the camera and an Ethernet cable to connect  
the UT-1 to an Ethernet network. Once connected, you  
can upload photos and movies to a computer or ftp  
server, control the camera remotely using optional  
Camera Control Pro 2 software, or browse pictures or  
control the camera remotely from an iPhone or web  
computer browser.  
USB Cable Gaskets and Connector Covers: Use a UF-4  
connector cover for USB cables and UF3-RU14 USB  
cable gasket to help prevent accidental  
disconnections. Before connecting the cable, attach  
the UF-4 at the camera end and the UF3-RU14 at the  
end that connects to the communication unit.  
LAN adapters  
(0 261)  
UF-4 (attaches to connector for camera)  
UF3-RU14 (attaches to connector for UT-1)  
Wireless Transmitter WT-5: Attach the WT-5 to the UT-1 to  
access wireless networks.  
Note: Use of LAN adapters requires an Ethernet or wireless network and  
some basic network knowledge. Be sure to upgrade any related software to  
the latest version.  
437  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Rubber Eyecup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the  
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.  
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To  
accommodate individual differences in vision,  
viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of –3, –2,  
0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use diopter adjustment lenses only  
if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built-  
in diopter adjustment control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test  
diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure  
that the desired focus can be achieved.  
Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the  
view through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2× for  
greater precision when framing.  
Eyepiece Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene at  
the center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus.  
DK-18 eyepiece adapter (available separately) required.  
Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching  
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing  
attachment to the D810.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14/Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-17A:  
These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid  
or cold conditions.  
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing  
Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the  
viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the  
image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when  
the camera is in the horizontal shooting position. The  
DR-5 supports diopter adjustment and can also  
magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2× for  
greater precision when framing (note that the edges of  
the frame will not be visible when the view is  
magnified).  
438  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The D810 is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal  
(0 3) for remote control and automatic photography.  
The terminal is provided with a cap, which protects the  
contacts when the terminal is not in use. The following  
accessories can be used (all lengths are approximate):  
Remote Cord MC-22/MC-22A: Remote shutter release with  
blue, yellow, and black terminals for connection to a  
remote shutter-triggering device, allowing control via  
sound or electronic signals (length 1 m/3 ft 3 in.).  
Remote Cord MC-30/MC-30A: Remote shutter release; can be  
used to reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft 7 in.).  
Remote Cord MC-36/MC-36A: Remote shutter release; can be  
used for interval timer photography or to reduce  
camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time  
exposure (length 85 cm/2 ft 9 in.).  
Remote  
terminal  
accessories  
Extension Cord MC-21/MC-21A: Can be connected to ML-3 or  
MC-series 20, 22, 22A, 23, 23A, 25, 25A, 30, 30A, 36, or  
36A. Only one MC-21 or MC-21A can be used at a time  
(length 3 m/9 ft 10 in.).  
Connecting Cord MC-23/MC-23A: Connects two cameras with  
ten-pin remote terminals for simultaneous operation  
(length 40 cm/1 ft 4 in.).  
Adapter Cord MC-25/MC-25A: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter  
cord for connection to devices with two-pin terminals,  
including the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2  
intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite remote control set  
(length 20 cm/8 in.).  
WR Adapter WR-A10: An adapter used to connect WR-R10  
wireless remote controllers (0 441) to cameras with  
ten-pin remote terminals.  
GPS Unit GP-1/GP-1A (0 233): Record latitude, longitude,  
altitude, and UTC time with pictures.  
439  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0 233): This 35 cm (1 ft 2 in.) cable  
connects the camera to older GARMIN eTrex- and  
geko-series GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or  
3.01 of the National Marine Electronics Association  
NMEA0183 data format. Only models that support PC  
interface cable connections are supported; the MC-35  
can not be used to connect GPS units via USB. The  
units connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub  
9-pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the  
GPS device; see the MC-35 instruction manual for  
details. Before turning the camera on, set the GPS  
device to NMEA mode (4800 baud); for more  
information, see the documentation provided with the  
GPS device.  
Remote  
terminal  
accessories  
Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote  
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft 3 in.).  
HDMI Cable HC-E1: An HDMI cable with a type C connector  
for connection to the camera and a type A connector for  
connection to HDMI devices.  
HDMI cables  
(0 269)  
Filters intended for special-effects photography may  
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.  
The D810 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.  
Use the C-PL or C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead.  
Use NC filters to protect the lens.  
To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended  
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or  
when a bright light source is in the frame.  
Filters  
Center-weighted metering is recommended with  
filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44,  
Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,  
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter  
manual for details.  
440  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10  
wireless remote controller is attached to ten-pin  
remote terminal using a WR-A10 adapter, the camera  
can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless  
remote controller.  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-1: The WR-1 can function as  
either a transmitter or a receiver and is used in  
combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or  
WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a  
WR-1 can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal  
for use as a receiver, allowing camera settings to be  
changed or the shutter to be released remotely by  
another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.  
Wireless  
remote  
controllers  
(0 357)  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a  
computer to record movies and photographs and save  
photographs directly to the computer hard disk. When  
Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs  
directly to the computer, the PC connection indicator  
(c) will appear in the control panel.  
Software  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the websites listed on  
page xxii for the latest information on supported operating systems. At  
default settings, Nikon Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates  
to Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the  
computer and the computer is connected to the Internet. A message is  
automatically displayed when an update is found.  
Stereo Microphone ME-1: Connect the ME-1 to the camera  
microphone jack to record stereo sound and reduce the  
chance of picking up equipment noise (such as the  
sounds produced by the lens during autofocusing;  
0 63).  
Microphones  
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest  
information.  
441  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power  
connector and AC adapter.  
1
Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-  
chamber (q) and power  
connector (w) covers.  
2
Insert the EP-5B power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the  
orientation shown, using the  
connector to keep the orange battery  
latch pressed to one side. The latch  
locks the connector in place when  
the connector is fully inserted.  
3
Close the battery-  
chamber cover.  
Position the power  
connector cable so that it  
passes through the power  
connector slot and close  
the battery-chamber  
cover.  
442  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Connect the EH-5b AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC  
adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r). A V  
icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered  
by the AC adapter and power connector.  
443  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the  
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the  
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera  
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic  
fields, such as televisions or radios  
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below  
–10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently  
with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the  
beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly  
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly.  
Camera body  
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera  
may cause damage not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust  
and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep  
Lens, mirror,  
the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To  
and viewfinder remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small  
amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with  
care.  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing  
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly  
with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply  
Monitor  
pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
444  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Image Sensor Cleaning  
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing  
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at  
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be  
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
❚❚ “Clean Now”  
Holding the camera base down, select  
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,  
then highlight Clean now and press J.  
The camera will check the image sensor  
and then begin cleaning. Other  
operations can not be performed while  
cleaning is in progress. Do not remove  
or disconnect the power source until  
cleaning ends and the setup menu is  
displayed.  
445  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
Choose from the following options:  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each  
time the camera is turned on.  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned  
during shutdown each time the camera is turned  
off.  
Clean at startup  
5
6
7
Clean at  
shutdown  
Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at  
shutdown  
startup and at shutdown.  
Cleaning off  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
1
2
Select Clean at startup/shutdown.  
Display the Clean image sensor  
menu as described on page 445.  
Highlight Clean at startup/  
shutdown and press 2.  
Select an option.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
446  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor  
cleaning. Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if  
the flash is charging.  
If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image  
sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 448) or consult a  
Nikon-authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,  
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the  
camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a  
short wait.  
447  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor  
using the Clean image sensor (0 445) option in the setup  
menu, the sensor can be cleaned manually as described below.  
Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only  
by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
1
Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or  
cleaning the image sensor. Turn the camera off and insert a  
fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and  
power connector. The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is  
only available in the setup menu at battery levels over J.  
2
3
Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Highlight Lock mirror up for  
cleaning in the setup menu and  
press 2.  
448  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed in the monitor and a row  
of dashes will appear in the control  
panel and viewfinder. To restore  
normal operation without  
inspecting the image sensor, turn  
the camera off.  
5
6
Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down. The mirror will be  
raised and the shutter curtain will  
open, revealing the image sensor.  
The display in the viewfinder will  
turn off and the row of dashes in the  
control panel will flash.  
Examine the image sensor.  
Holding the camera so that light falls  
on the image sensor, examine the  
sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign  
objects are present, proceed to  
Step 8.  
449  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
8
Clean the sensor.  
Remove any dust and lint from the  
sensor with a blower. Do not use a  
blower-brush, as the bristles could  
damage the sensor. Dirt that can not  
be removed with a blower can only  
be removed by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch  
or wipe the sensor.  
Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter  
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.  
D Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera  
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close  
automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source  
while the mirror is raised.  
If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound  
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will  
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End  
cleaning or inspection immediately.  
450  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from  
coming into contact with the image sensor during production and  
shipping. The D810, however, is designed to be used with  
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera  
when lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this  
foreign matter may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in  
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera  
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign  
matter that may be adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging  
lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the  
sensor as described above, or have the sensor cleaned by authorized  
Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of  
foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image  
options available in some imaging applications.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or  
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,  
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are  
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any  
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional  
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
451  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or  
vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if  
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the  
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such  
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold  
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent  
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the  
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation  
or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields  
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with  
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the  
product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the  
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light  
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect  
in photographs.  
452  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove  
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the  
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth  
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In  
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or  
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon  
return to normal.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other  
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 445) for information on cleaning the  
image sensor.  
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and  
easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on  
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air  
currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the  
curtain.  
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no  
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.  
453  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to  
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic  
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a  
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that  
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once  
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before  
putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before  
putting the battery away.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not  
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or  
while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in  
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product  
memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of  
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while  
the AC adapter is connected.  
454  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high  
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%  
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain  
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),  
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the  
device.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or  
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.  
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois  
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor  
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.  
Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it  
unattended.  
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly  
handled. Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii–xvi of  
this manual. Observe the following precautions when handling  
batteries:  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
Keep the battery terminals clean.  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and  
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of  
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point  
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some  
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the  
camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location  
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot  
or extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six  
months.  
455  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully  
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully  
discharged must be charged before use.  
The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in  
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature  
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not  
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before  
charging.  
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C  
(41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below  
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be  
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C  
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The  
battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above  
60 °C (140 °F).  
If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during  
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then  
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the  
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger  
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure  
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the  
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only  
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging  
again. Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged  
at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature  
at which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature  
below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info (0 374)  
display may show a temporary decrease.  
456  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair  
battery performance.  
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge  
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.  
Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.  
The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the  
MH-25a only. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug  
when not in use.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on  
important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.  
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase  
replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the  
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully  
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a  
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.  
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local  
regulations.  
457  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto (0 118) is shown  
in the following graph:  
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum  
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4D)  
f/1  
f/1.4  
f/2  
f/2.8  
f/4  
f/5.6  
f/8  
f/11  
f/16  
f/22  
f/32  
30" 15" 8" 4" 2" 1" 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 1/8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO  
sensitivity; the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO  
100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used, values over  
16 1  
/
3 EV are reduced to 16 1  
3 EV.  
/
458  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of  
common problems below before consulting your retailer or  
Nikon-authorized service representative.  
Battery/Display  
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the  
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,  
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,  
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data  
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been  
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power  
source.  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 17). If this does not  
correct the problem, select single-servo AF (AF-S; 0 87), single-point AF  
(0 90), and the center focus point (0 94), and then frame a high-  
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the  
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the  
viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using  
optional corrective lenses (0 438).  
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 13, 19).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting  
c2 (Standby timer) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 319, 320).  
Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response  
times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.  
459  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Memory card is locked (SD cards only; 0 22), full, or not inserted  
(0 14).  
Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f11 (Slot empty release  
lock; 0 354) and no memory card is inserted (0 14).  
Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not  
apply to type G and E lenses). If B is displayed in the control panel,  
select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f9 (Customize command  
dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture  
Exposure mode f selected with A or & selected for shutter speed  
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom  
Setting d4 (Exposure delay mode; 0 322).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release  
mode:  
Lower the built-in flash (0 107).  
Turn HDR off (0 184).  
Photos are out of focus:  
Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 87).  
Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus  
lock (0 96, 100).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be  
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using  
compatible flash units, choose 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP)  
for full range of shutter speeds (0 329).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in  
focus mode AF-C: use A AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus (0 96).  
460  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Can not select focus point:  
Unlock focus selector lock (0 94).  
Auto-area AF or face-priority AF selected for AF-area mode; choose  
another mode (0 40, 90).  
Camera is in playback mode (0 235).  
Menus are in use (0 24).  
Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 34).  
Can not select AF mode:  
Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 87).  
Select No restrictions for Custom Setting a12 (Autofocus mode  
restrictions, 0 314).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 87).  
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 79).  
Choose image size using NEF (RAW) recording > Image size option in  
shooting menu.  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off  
(0 299).  
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus  
mode (0 87). Choose AF-S. If an option other than auto-area AF is  
selected for AF-area mode, select center focus point (0 94).  
The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.  
Off is selected for Custom Setting a10 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator)  
(0 313).  
Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot  
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.  
461  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically  
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to  
record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended  
periods  
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the  
internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may  
feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.  
Image artifacts appear during live view: The temperature of the camera’s  
internal circuits may rise during live view, causing image “noise” in the  
form of bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog. Exit live view  
when the camera is not in use.  
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option  
for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power  
supply (0 371).  
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or  
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie  
recording.  
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines, or reddish areas) appears  
in photos:  
To reduce randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines, choose lower  
ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0 109, 299).  
To reduce bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog at shutter  
speeds slower than 1 s or to reduce reddish areas and other artifacts in  
long time-exposures, enable long exposure noise reduction (0 299).  
Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise  
462  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If  
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 445).  
Colors are unnatural:  
Adjust white balance to match light source (0 148).  
Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 170).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 161).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset manual white balance: Image was not  
created with D810 (0 167).  
White balance bracketing unavailable:  
NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image  
quality (0 79).  
Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 209).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for  
sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a  
series of photographs, choose another setting (0 175).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 129).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g  
(0 116, 132).  
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie  
settings > Microphone sensitivity (0 62).  
463  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF  
+ JPEG (0 80).  
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other  
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.  
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
Select On for Rotate tall (0 288).  
Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 373).  
Photo is displayed in image review (0 236).  
Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 373).  
Can not delete photo:  
Picture is protected: remove protection (0 250).  
Memory card is locked (0 22).  
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera  
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for  
Playback folder (0 281).  
Can not change print order:  
Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 19, 251).  
Memory card is locked (0 22).  
464  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Can not select photo for printing: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be  
printed by direct USB connection. Transfer photos to computer and  
print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX-D (available for  
download; 0 260). NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG format using  
NEF (RAW) processing (0 399).  
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable is  
connected (0 269).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor  
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Dust off  
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can  
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor  
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before  
image sensor cleaning is performed (0 370).  
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party  
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,  
or vignette control. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Nikon software such as  
Capture NX-D (available for download; 0 260).  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or  
transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer (0 255).  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 18).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain  
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that  
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an  
optional power connector and AC adapter (0 374).  
465  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear  
in the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Lens aperture ring is  
not set to minimum  
aperture.  
Solution  
Set ring to minimum  
aperture (highest  
f-number).  
0
B
(flashes)  
Ready a fully-charged  
spare battery.  
H
d
Low battery.  
Battery exhausted.  
Recharge or replace  
battery.  
Battery can not be  
used.  
Contact Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
An extremely  
exhausted  
Replace the battery, or  
recharge the battery if  
the rechargeable  
Li-ion battery is  
exhausted.  
H
d
(flashes) (flashes)  
rechargeable Li-ion  
battery or a third-  
party battery is  
inserted either in the  
camera or in the  
optional MB-D12  
battery pack.  
B
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.  
(flashes)  
466  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
No lens attached, or  
non-CPU lens attached  
without specifying  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture shown in  
stops from maximum  
aperture.  
Aperture value will be  
displayed if maximum  
aperture is specified.  
F
F H Camera unable to focus Change composition or  
(flashes) using autofocus.  
focus manually.  
Use a lower ISO  
sensitivity.  
Use optional ND filter. 440  
In exposure mode:  
f Increase shutter  
speed  
Subject too bright;  
photo will be  
overexposed.  
(Exposure  
g Choose a smaller  
aperture (higher  
f-number)  
Use a higher ISO  
sensitivity.  
indicators and  
shutter speed or  
aperture display  
flash)  
Use flash. In exposure 189,  
mode: 428  
f Lower shutter speed 119  
Subject too dark; photo  
will be underexposed.  
g Choose a larger  
aperture (lower  
f-number)  
467  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Change shutter speed  
or select manual  
exposure mode.  
Change shutter speed  
or select manual  
exposure mode.  
Wait until processing is  
complete.  
A
(flashes)  
A selected in  
exposure mode f.  
&
(flashes)  
&selected in exposure  
mode f.  
1
k
Processing in progress.  
(flashes) (flashes)  
Check photo in  
monitor; if  
underexposed, adjust  
settings and try again.  
If indicator flashes for 3s  
after flash fires, photo  
may be underexposed.  
c
(flashes)  
Reduce quality or size. 79, 83  
Delete photographs  
after copying  
important images to  
computer or other  
device.  
Memory insufficient to  
record further photos at  
current settings, or  
camera has run out of  
file or folder numbers.  
n
j
i/j  
(flashes)  
(flashes)  
Insert new memory  
card.  
Release shutter. If error  
persists or appears  
frequently, consult  
Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
O
(flashes)  
Camera malfunction.  
A The i and j Icons  
These icons flash to show the card affected.  
468  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
Turn camera off  
and confirm that  
card is correctly  
inserted.  
0
Camera cannot  
detect memory  
card.  
No memory card.  
S
Error accessing Use Nikon-  
memory card. approved card.  
Check that  
contacts are  
clean. If card is  
damaged,contact  
retailer or Nikon-  
authorized  
This memory card  
cannot be used.  
Card may be  
damaged.  
Insert another card.  
W
R
service  
representative.  
Unable to create Delete files or  
i/j  
(flashes)  
new folder.  
insert new  
memory card  
after copying  
important images  
to computer or  
other device.  
469  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Check that Eye-Fi 383  
card firmware is  
up to date.  
W, Camera can not  
control Eye-Fi  
(flashes) card.  
Copy files on  
Eye-Fi card to a  
computer or  
g
R
other device and  
format card, or  
insert new card.  
Memory card is  
W, Memory card is  
locked. Slide lock to  
“write” position.  
j
locked (write  
(flashes) protected).  
Slide card write-  
protect switch to  
“write” position.  
W,  
Eye-Fi card is  
R,  
Not available if  
Eye-Fi card is locked.  
locked (write  
j
protected).  
(flashes)  
Memory card has  
This card is not  
formatted.  
Format the card.  
Format memory  
card or insert new 14, 366  
memory card.  
[C] not been  
(flashes) formatted for use  
in camera.  
Wait for the internal  
circuits to cool  
before resuming  
live view or movie  
recording.  
The internal  
temperature of  
the camera is  
high.  
Unable to start live  
view. Please wait.  
470  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Select folder  
No images on  
memory card or  
in folder(s)  
selected for  
playback.  
containing images  
from Playback  
folder menu or  
insert memory card  
containing images.  
No images can be  
played back until  
another folder has  
been selected or  
Hide image used  
to allow at least  
one image to be  
displayed.  
Folder contains no  
images.  
All photos in  
current folder are  
hidden.  
All images are  
hidden.  
File has been  
created or  
modified using a File can not be  
computer or played back on  
different make of camera.  
camera, or file is  
corrupt.  
Cannot display this  
file.  
Images created  
with other devices  
can not be  
Selected image  
can not be  
retouched.  
Cannot select this  
file.  
retouched.  
471  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
Check printer. To  
resume, select  
Continue (if  
available).  
0
Check printer.  
Printer error.  
263 *  
Paper in printer is Insert paper of  
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
not of selected  
size.  
correct size and  
select Continue.  
263 *  
263 *  
263 *  
Paper is jammed Clear jam and  
in printer.  
select Continue.  
Insert paper of  
selected size and  
select Continue.  
Check ink. To  
resume, select  
Continue.  
Printer is out of  
paper.  
Out of paper.  
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
Ink error.  
263 *  
263 *  
Printer is out of Replace ink and  
ink. select Continue.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
472  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
❚❚ Nikon D810 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Lens mount  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF  
contacts)  
Effective angle of view Nikon FX format  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
36.3 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
35.9 × 24.0 mm CMOS sensor  
37.09 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference  
data (Capture NX-D software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
FX (36×24) image area  
7360×4912 (L)  
3680×2456 (S)  
1.2× (30×20) image area  
6144×4080 (L)  
3072×2040 (S)  
DX (24×16) image area  
4800×3200 (L)  
2400×1600 (S)  
5 : 4 (30×24) image area  
6144×4912 (L)  
5520×3680 (M)  
4608×3056 (M)  
3600×2400 (M)  
4608×3680 (M)  
3072×2456 (S)  
473  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
FX-format photographs taken in movie live view  
6720×3776 (L)  
5040×2832 (M)  
3360×1888 (S)  
DX-format photographs taken in movie live view  
4800×2704 (L)  
3600×2024 (M)  
2400×1352 (S)  
Note: Photographs taken in movie live view have an aspect ratio of  
16 : 9. A DX-based format is used for photographs taken using the  
DX (24 × 16) 1.5× image area; an FX-based format is used for all  
other photographs.  
File format  
NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,  
compressed, or uncompressed; small size  
available (12-bit uncompressed only)  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx.  
1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx.  
1 : 16) compression (Size priority); Optimal  
quality compression available  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in  
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,  
Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be  
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC  
and SDXC memory cards; Type I CompactFlash  
memory cards (UDMA compliant)  
Dual card slots  
Either card can be used for primary or backup  
storage or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and  
JPEG images; pictures can be copied between  
cards.  
File system  
DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge  
474  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Frame coverage  
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder  
FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100%  
vertical  
1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97%  
vertical  
DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97%  
vertical  
5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100%  
vertical  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,  
–1.0 m–1  
)
17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of  
viewfinder eyepiece lens)  
3–+1 m–1  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with  
AF area brackets (framing grid can be displayed)  
Quick return  
Reflex mirror  
Depth-of-field preview Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to  
value selected by user (g and h modes) or by  
camera (e and f modes)  
Lens aperture  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including  
type G, E, and D lenses (some restrictions apply to  
PC lenses) and DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16 1.5×  
image area), AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU AI  
lenses (exposure modes g and h only). IX NIKKOR  
lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI lenses can  
not be used.  
The electronic rangefinder can be used with  
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster (the electronic rangefinder supports the 11  
focus points with lenses that have a maximum  
aperture of f/8 or faster).  
475  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shutter  
Type  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-  
plane mechanical shutter; electronic front-curtain  
shutter available in mirror up release mode  
1
Speed  
/
8000 – 30 s in steps of 1  
/
3, 1  
2, or 1 EV, bulb, time,  
/
X250  
X=1 250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1  
slower (flash range drops at speeds between 1  
and 1  
Flash sync speed  
/
/
320 s or  
/
250  
/320 s)  
Release  
Release mode  
S (single frame), T (continuous low speed),  
U (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-  
release), M (quiet continuous shutter-release),  
E (self-timer), V (mirror up)  
With EN-EL15 batteries  
Approximate frame  
advance rate  
Image area: FX/5 : 4  
- T: 1–5 fps  
- U: 5 fps  
Image area: DX/1.2×  
- T: 1–6 fps  
- U: 6 fps  
- M: 3 fps  
- M: 3 fps  
Other power sources  
Image area: FX/5 : 4  
- T: 1–5 fps  
- U: 5 fps  
Image area: DX  
- T: 1–6 fps  
- U: 7 fps  
- M: 3 fps  
- M: 3 fps  
Image area: 1.2×  
- T: 1–6 fps  
- U: 6 fps  
- M: 3 fps  
Self-timer  
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5,  
1, 2, or 3 s  
476  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with  
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels  
Metering method  
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E, and  
D lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU  
lenses); color matrix metering available with  
non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data  
Center-weighted: Weight of approximately 75%  
given to 12 mm circle in center of frame.  
Diameter of circle can be changed to 8, 15, or 20  
mm, or weighting can be based on average of  
entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm circle)  
Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)  
centered on selected focus point (on center  
focus point when non-CPU lens is used)  
Highlight-weighted: Available with type G, E, and D  
lenses; equivalent to center-weighted when  
other lenses are used.  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
metering: 0–20 EV  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
Combined CPU and AI  
Exposure mode  
Programmed auto with flexible program (e);  
shutter-priority auto (f); aperture-priority auto  
(g); manual (h)  
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1  
Exposure bracketing  
/
3, 1  
/2, or 1 EV  
2–9 frames in steps of 1  
frames in steps of 2 or 3 EV  
2–9 frames in steps of 1  
frames in steps of 2 or 3 EV  
/
3, 1  
/
2, 2  
/
3, or 1 EV; 2–5  
Flash bracketing  
/
3, 1  
/
2, 2  
3, or 1 EV; 2–5  
/
White balance  
bracketing  
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3  
477  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exposure  
ADL bracketing  
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–  
5 frames using preset values for all frames  
Luminosity locked at detected value with A AE-L/  
AF-L button  
Exposure lock  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
ISO 64 – 12800 in steps of 1  
/
3, 1  
2, or 1 EV. Can also  
/
be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 32  
equivalent) below ISO 64 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7,  
1, or 2 EV (ISO 51200 equivalent) above ISO 12800;  
auto ISO sensitivity control available  
Active D-Lighting  
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High,  
Normal, Low, or Off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus  
sensor module with TTL phase detection, fine-  
tuning, 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type  
sensors; f/8 supported by 11 sensors), and  
AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft  
8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
–2 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-  
servo AF (AF-C); predictive focus tracking  
automatically activated according to subject  
status  
Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be  
used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 51- point dynamic-area  
AF, 3D-tracking, group-area AF, auto-area AF  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release  
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing  
A AE-L/AF-L button  
Focus lock  
478  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
Manual pop-up with button release and a Guide  
Number of 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,  
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Flash control  
TTL: i-TTL flash control using RGB sensor with  
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels is available with  
built-in flash; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR is used with matrix, center-weighted, and  
highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL flash  
for digital SLR with spot metering  
Flash mode  
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync,  
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow  
sync, slow rear-curtain sync, off; Auto FP High-  
Speed Sync supported  
Flash compensation  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1  
/
3, 1  
2, or 1 EV  
/
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is  
fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full  
output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Nikon CLS supported; commander mode option  
System (CLS)  
Sync terminal  
available  
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent  
(7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade,  
preset manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot  
white balance measurement available during live  
view), choose color temperature (2500 K–  
10,000 K), all with fine-tuning  
479  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Live view  
Modes  
Live view photography (still images), movie live  
view (movies)  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time  
servo AF (AF-F)  
Manual focus (M)  
AF-area mode  
Autofocus  
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,  
subject-tracking AF  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera  
selects focus point automatically when face-  
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)  
Movie  
Metering  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor  
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted  
Frame size (pixels) and 1920×1080; 60 p (progressive), 50 p, 30 p, 25 p,  
frame rate  
24 p  
1280×720; 60 p, 50 p  
Actual frame rates for 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p, and  
24 p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps  
respectively; options support both high and  
normal image quality  
File format  
MOV  
Video compression  
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding  
Audio recording format Linear PCM  
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity  
adjustable  
480  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Movie  
ISO sensitivity  
Exposure modes e, f, and g: Auto ISO sensitivity  
control (ISO 64 to Hi 2) with selectable upper  
limit  
Exposure mode h: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO  
64 to Hi 2) available with selectable upper limit;  
manual selection (ISO 64 to 12800 in steps of 1  
3,  
/
1
/
2, or 1 EV) with additional options available  
equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or  
2 EV (ISO 51200 equivalent) above ISO 12800  
Index marking, time-lapse photography  
Other options  
Monitor  
Monitor  
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1229 k-dot (VGA;  
640 × RGBW × 480 = 1,228,800 dots), TFT monitor  
with 170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame  
coverage, and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images)  
playback with playback zoom, movie playback,  
photo and/or movie slide shows, histogram  
display, highlights, photo information, location  
data display, and auto image rotation  
481  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interface  
USB  
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0 Micro-B connector);  
connection to built-in USB port is recommended  
Type C HDMI connector  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in  
power supported)  
HDMI output  
Audio input  
Audio output  
Ten-pin remote  
terminal  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter)  
Can be used to connect optional remote control,  
optional WR-R10 (requires WR-A10 adapter) or  
WR-1 wireless remote controller, GP-1/GP-1A GPS  
unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183  
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS  
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin  
connector)  
Supported languages  
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified  
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,  
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian,  
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Marathi,  
Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese (Portugal  
and Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Spanish,  
Swedish, Tamil, Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian,  
Vietnamese  
482  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power source  
Battery  
Battery pack  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL15 battery  
Optional MB-D12 multi-power battery pack with  
one rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18a or EN-EL18  
Li-ion battery (available separately), one  
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15 Li-ion battery, or  
eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium batteries. A  
BL-5 battery-chamber cover is required when  
using EN-EL18a or EN-EL18 batteries.  
AC adapter  
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power  
connector (available separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1
/
4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 146 × 123 × 81.5 mm (5.8 × 4.9 × 3.3 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 980 g (2 lb 2.6 oz) with battery and SD  
memory card but without body cap; approx.  
880 g/1 lb 15.1 oz (camera body only)  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Humidity  
85% or less (no condensation)  
Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at  
the temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA): 23 3 °C  
(73.4 5.4 °F).  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in  
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that  
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
483  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MH-25a Battery Charger  
Rated input  
(in North America)  
Rated input  
(in other regions)  
Rated output  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A  
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A  
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion batteries  
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient  
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge  
remains  
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.),  
excluding projections  
Length of power cable  
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft)  
(if supplied)  
Weight  
Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied power  
connector (power cable or AC wall adapter)  
EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery  
Type  
Rated capacity  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.0 V, 1900 mAh  
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 88 g (3.1 oz), excluding terminal cover  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in  
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that  
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
484  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a  
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure  
compatibility among different makes of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard  
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the  
memory card.  
Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File  
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which  
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color  
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital  
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output  
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for  
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices  
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-  
compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
A Trademark Information  
Mac and OS X are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United  
States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista  
are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge is  
a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the  
SD-3C, LLC. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other  
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
485  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A FreeType License (FreeType2)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project  
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.  
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The HarfBuzz Project  
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights  
reserved.  
486  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Approved Memory Cards  
The camera accepts the SD and CompactFlash memory cards  
listed in the following sections. Other cards have not been  
tested. For more details on the cards listed below, please contact  
the manufacturer.  
❚❚ SD Memory Cards  
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in  
the camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are  
recommended for movie recording. Recording may end  
unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.  
SD cards  
2 GB 1  
SDHC cards 2  
SDXC cards 3  
64 GB, 128 GB  
64 GB  
SanDisk  
Toshiba  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,  
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB  
Panasonic  
48 GB, 64 GB  
2 GB 1  
Lexar Media  
Platinum II  
Professional  
Full-HD Video  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB  
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
1
2
3
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB  
cards.  
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-  
compliant. The camera supports UHS-1.  
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card  
will be used are SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-1.  
487  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ CompactFlash Memory Cards  
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been  
tested and approved for use in the camera. Cards with a write  
speed of 30 MB/s (200×) are recommended for movie recording.  
At slower speeds, movies may not play back smoothly and  
recording may end unexpectedly. Type II cards and microdrives  
can not be used.  
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB,  
256 GB  
SDCFXPS  
Extreme Pro  
SDCFXP 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB  
SDCFXS 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB  
SDCFX 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB  
SDCFX4 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SDCFX3 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SDCFH 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
Extreme  
SanDisk  
Extreme IV  
Extreme III  
Ultra II  
SDCFHS 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SDCFHG 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
Ultra  
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB,  
256 GB  
1066 ×  
1000 × 16 GB, 32 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB  
800 ×  
600 ×  
400 ×  
300 ×  
233 ×  
133 ×  
80 ×  
200 ×  
80 ×  
60 ×  
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB  
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
4 GB  
Professional UDMA  
Lexar Media  
Professional  
Platinum II  
488  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures  
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk SDCFXPS-016G-J92 card  
at different image quality (0 79), image size (0 83), and image  
area settings (0 74).  
*
❚❚ FX (36× 24) Image Area  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW), Compressed,  
12-bit  
Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2  
Large  
Large  
Large  
Large  
31.9 MB  
40.7 MB  
29.2 MB  
36.3 MB  
257  
199  
348  
291  
47  
28  
58  
35  
NEF (RAW), Compressed,  
14-bit  
Large  
Small  
55.9 MB  
27.9 MB  
257  
516  
34  
18  
NEF (RAW), Uncompressed,  
12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Uncompressed,  
14-bit  
Large  
73.2 MB  
199  
23  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
107.2 MB  
60.9 MB  
27.9 MB  
18.1 MB  
11.0 MB  
5.6 MB  
9.4 MB  
5.5 MB  
2.8 MB  
3.2 MB  
2.2 MB  
1.4 MB  
137  
242  
526  
25  
34  
72  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine3  
642  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
1000  
2100  
1200  
2100  
4200  
2400  
4100  
7800  
JPEG normal3  
JPEG basic 3  
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.  
489  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
*
❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW), Compressed,  
12-bit  
Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2  
Large  
Large  
Large  
Large  
14.6 MB  
18.3 MB  
13.3 MB  
16.4 MB  
580  
453  
777  
653  
100  
97  
100  
100  
NEF (RAW), Compressed,  
14-bit  
Large  
Small  
24.4 MB  
16.4 MB  
580  
1100  
78  
23  
NEF(RAW), Uncompressed,  
12-bit  
NEF(RAW), Uncompressed,  
14-bit  
Large  
31.8 MB  
453  
46  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
46.2 MB  
26.6 MB  
12.4 MB  
8.6 MB  
5.3 MB  
2.9 MB  
4.4 MB  
2.7 MB  
1.5 MB  
1.7 MB  
1.3 MB  
0.9 MB  
317  
549  
39  
75  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine 3  
1100  
1400  
2200  
4000  
2700  
4300  
7600  
5200  
8100  
13,200  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
JPEG normal 3  
JPEG basic 3  
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.  
490  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.  
Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops if  
Optimal quality is selected for JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG  
compression, ISO sensitivity is set to Hi 0.3 or higher, or auto distortion control or long  
exposure noise reduction is on.  
3
Figures assume JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG compression is set to Size  
priority. Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of  
images and buffer capacity drop accordingly.  
A d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 322)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single  
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100.  
491  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Life  
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with  
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,  
temperature, interval between shots, and the length of time  
menus are displayed. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also  
varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not  
be used. Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D12  
multi-power battery pack are given below.  
1
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard )  
- One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 1200 shots  
- One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 1200 shots  
- One EN-EL18a battery (MB-D12): Approximately 2070 shots  
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D12): Approximately 1460 shots  
2
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard )  
- One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 3860 shots  
- One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 3860 shots  
- One EN-EL18a battery (MB-D12): Approximately 6980 shots  
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D12): Approximately 4060 shots  
3
Movies  
- One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 40 minutes of HD  
footage  
- One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 40 minutes of HD  
footage  
- One EN-EL18a battery (MB-D12): Approximately 80 minutes of HD  
footage  
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D12): Approximately 50 minutes of  
HD footage  
492  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens  
under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one  
photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot. Live  
view not used.  
Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II lens under the  
following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image quality set to JPEG normal, image size  
set to Large, shutter speed 1  
250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times  
/
after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then taken in  
succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once standby  
timer has expired.  
3
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S  
NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging  
Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 20 minutes (1080/60p) in length or  
4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
Using the monitor  
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs  
Slow shutter speeds  
Using an optional UT-1 communication unit or WT-5 wireless  
transmitter  
Using a GP-1 or GP-1A GPS unit  
Using a WR-R10/WR-1 wireless remote controller or ML-3  
modulite remote control set  
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon  
EN-EL15 batteries:  
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce  
battery performance.  
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose  
their charge if left unused.  
493  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash  
and AF-Assist Illuminator  
The lenses listed in this section may block the built-in flash or  
AF-assist illuminator under some conditions.  
❚❚ AF-Assist Illumination  
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:  
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
The other lenses in this section may block the AF-assist  
illuminator at short ranges, interfering with autofocus when  
lighting is poor. The following may block the illuminator at  
ranges under 0.7 m (2 ft 4 in.):  
AF Micro-Nikkor 200mm f/4D IF-ED  
The following may block the illuminator at ranges under 1.1 m  
(3 ft 8 in.):  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR  
494  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following may block the illuminator at ranges under 1.5 m  
(5 ft):  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor ED 70–200mm f/2.8G (IF)  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 70–300mm f/4–5.6G  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
The following may block the illuminator at ranges under 2.3 m  
(7 ft 7 in.):  
AF VR Zoom-Nikkor 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED  
495  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash may be unable to light the entire subject with  
the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:  
Minimum distance  
without vignetting  
Lens  
Zoom position  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor  
12–24mm f/4G IF-ED  
18–24 mm  
No vignetting  
20 mm  
24–55 mm  
1.5 m/5 ft  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor  
17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm  
f/4G ED VR  
28 mm  
35 mm  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
28 mm  
35 mm  
24 mm  
28–35 mm  
24 mm  
28–35 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
24 mm  
28–120 mm  
28 mm  
35–120 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
35 mm  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/5 ft  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm  
f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm  
f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm  
f/2.8D IF  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm  
f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor  
24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm  
f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm  
f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *  
50–300 mm  
24 mm  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
496  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash  
will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.  
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-S, AI-, AI-modified  
NIKKOR, and Nikon Series E non-CPU lenses with a focal length  
of 24–300mm. AI 50–300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–300mm f/4.5,  
and AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom  
position of 180mm or above, and AI 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses  
at a zoom position of 135mm or above.  
497  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Y (Flash compensation indicator) ..  
Symbols  
e (Programmed auto) .................... 118  
z (Flexible program indicator) .. 118  
f (Shutter-priority auto) ............... 119  
g (Aperture-priority auto) ............ 120  
h (Manual) .......................................... 121  
S ............................................................ 102  
T .................................................102, 321  
U .......................................................... 102  
J ........................................................... 102  
M .......................................................... 102  
E (Self-timer) ...........................103, 106  
V ..............................................103, 108  
K (Single-point AF) ..........................90  
I (Dynamic-area AF) .......................90  
H (Auto-area AF) ...............................91  
! (Face-priority AF) ..........................40  
5 (Wide-area AF) ................................40  
6 (Normal-area AF) ...........................40  
& (Subject-tracking AF) ................40  
L (Matrix) .......................................... 114  
M (Center-weighted) ............114, 317  
N (Spot) .............................................. 114  
R (Info) button ............................8, 201  
a (Live view) button .................35, 49  
b button .......................4, 9, 42, 55, 205  
Y button ........................................1, 115  
Q (Help) ..................................................25  
D switch ...................................... 16, 341  
I (Focus indicator) ...........30, 96, 101  
X (Flash sync indicator) .................. 329  
m (White balance fine-tuning) 153  
y (HDR indicator) ........................... 185  
n (Multiple exposure indicator) 210  
c (PC mode indicator) ................ 441  
F (Aperture stop indicator) ...... 120,  
o (Satellite signal indicator) ........233  
R (Shutter-speed lock icon) ........126  
R (Aperture lock icon) ...................127  
R (HDR (series) indicator) .............188  
R (Multiple exposure (series)  
indicator) ...........................................211  
B .............................................................5  
T ............................................................203  
Q (Interval timer indicator) .......219  
Q (Time-lapse indicator) ............227  
s (MB-D12 battery indicator) ......328  
P (Time-lapse recording indicator) ..  
c (“Beep” indicator) .........................321  
Z (Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator) ...........................................112  
f (Bracketing indicator) ... 134,139,  
E (Exposure compensation  
indicator) ...........................................131  
L (Preset manual) .............. 148, 158  
Numerics  
1.2× (30 × 20) 1.2× ............................ 75  
12-bit ...................................................... 82  
14-bit ...................................................... 82  
3D color matrix metering III .........114  
3D-tracking ................................... 90, 92  
5 : 4 (30 × 24) ....................................... 75  
A
AC adapter ............................... 436, 442  
Accessories .........................................436  
Active D-Lighting ................... 143, 182  
Add items (My Menu) .....................414  
ADL bracketing ....................... 143, 338  
498  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) 133,  
AE only (Auto bracketing set) .... 133,  
B
Backlight ......................................16, 326  
Backup ................................................... 86  
Battery ......i, 13, 14, 19, 327, 328, 374,  
AE-L/AF-L button .................97, 349, 363  
AF ....................3941, 8799, 306314  
AF activation ..................................... 308  
AF area brackets ............................ 6, 17  
AF fine-tune ....................................... 380  
AF-area mode ...............................40, 90  
AF-assist ........................... 313, 425, 434  
AF-C ............................................... 87, 306  
AF-F .........................................................39  
AF-mode button ............39, 41, 88, 91  
B button ................................ 88, 308  
AF-S ........................................ 39, 87, 307  
After delete ........................................ 287  
Angle of view ................... 74, 426427  
Aperture ..........................120121, 126  
Aperture lock ...........................126, 350  
Aperture-priority auto ................... 120  
Approved memory cards ............. 487  
Aspect ratio ................................ 74, 391  
Assign MB-D12 AF-ON ................... 356  
Assign remote (WR) Fn button ... 357  
Attaching the lens ..............................15  
Auto (White balance) ..................... 148  
Auto bracketing ............ 133, 338, 339  
Auto bracketing (Mode M) .......... 339  
Auto bracketing set ........................ 338  
Auto distortion control ................. 298  
Auto DX crop .......................................75  
Auto FP high-speed sync. ....329, 330  
Auto image rotation ....................... 373  
Auto ISO sensitivity control ......... 111  
Auto-area AF .................................91, 92  
Autofocus .....3941, 8799, 306314  
Autofocus mode ..........................39, 87  
Autofocus mode restrictions ...... 314  
Battery charger ............. i, 13, 436, 484  
Battery info .........................................374  
Battery order ......................................328  
Battery pack .104, 327, 328, 356, 436  
Beep ......................................................321  
D button ..134, 139, 143, 188, 211,  
Black-and-white (Monochrome) 392  
Blue intensifier ..................................393  
Body cap ..........................................i, 436  
Border ..................................................265  
Bracketing .......................133, 338, 339  
Bracketing order ..............................340  
Built-in AF-assist Illuminator ........313  
Built-in flash ............................. 189, 425  
Bulb ............................................. 121, 123  
Burst ............................................ 322, 345  
C
Camera Control Pro 2 .....................441  
Capture NX-D .............................80, 369  
Center-weighted metering 114, 317  
Charging the battery ........................ 13  
Choose color temp. (White balance)  
Choose image area ............75, 77, 348  
Choose start/end point ................... 67  
CL mode shooting speed ..............321  
Clean image sensor .........................445  
Clock ..............................................18, 372  
Clock battery ................................ 5, 203  
Cloudy (White balance) .................148  
CLS ........................................................428  
Color balance ....................................394  
Color outline ......................................406  
499  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color sketch ...................................... 407  
Color space ........................................ 296  
Color temperature ........148, 150, 155  
Commander mode ................331, 334  
Depth-of-field ...................................117  
Destination (Movie settings) ......... 63  
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ....  
Communication unit ...................... 437 Diopter .........................................17, 438  
CompactFlash ..................14, 366, 487  
Compatible lenses .......................... 419  
Compressed (Type) ...........................81  
Computer ........................................... 253  
Connector for external microphone  
Continuous high speed ................ 102  
Continuous low speed .........102, 321  
Continuous release mode ............ 102  
Continuous-servo AF .............. 87, 306  
Control panel ......................................... 5  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) ...  
Direct sunlight (White balance) ..148  
Distortion control ............................405  
D-Lighting ..........................................388  
DPOF .................................266, 267, 485  
DPOF print order ..............................267  
Dust off ref photo ............................369  
DX (24 × 16) 1.5× ........................ 59, 75  
DX format ............................................. 74  
DX-based (movie) format ............... 60  
Dynamic-area AF ........................ 90, 92  
E
Easy exposure compensation .....316  
Edit movie ...................................67, 384  
Electronic front-curtain shutter ..323  
Electronic rangefinder ...................101  
Ethernet .................................... 261, 437  
EV steps for exposure cntrl ...........315  
Exif .........................................................485  
Exp./flash comp. step value .........315  
Exposure .......114, 116, 128, 130, 133  
Exposure bracketing ....133, 338, 339  
Exposure comp. for flash. .............338  
Exposure compensation ...............130  
Exposure delay mode ....................322  
Exposure differential ......................186  
Exposure indicator ..........................122  
Exposure lock ....................................128  
Exposure meters .......................34, 319  
Exposure mode ................................116  
Exposure program ...........................458  
Exposure smoothing ............ 218, 224  
Extended menu banks ...................292  
External microphone ........62, 63, 441  
Eye-Fi upload ....................................382  
Copy image(s) .................................. 283  
Copyright information .........245, 376  
CPU contacts ..................................... 422  
CPU lens ....................................... 23, 419  
Creative Lighting System ............. 428  
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu)  
Cross screen ...................................... 393  
Custom setting bank ..................... 304  
Custom Settings .............................. 300  
Customize command dials .......... 351  
Cyanotype (Monochrome) .......... 392  
D
Date and time ............................ 18, 372  
Date format ................................ 18, 372  
Daylight saving time ............... 18, 372  
DCF ....................................................... 485  
Default settings ......................206, 272  
Delete ........................................... 33, 251  
Delete all images ............................. 252  
Delete current image .............. 33, 251  
Deleting selected photographs . 252  
500  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus tracking ............................88, 308  
Focus tracking with lock-on .........308  
Focusing screen ...............................475  
Focus-mode selector ........39, 87, 100  
Format .................................................366  
Format memory card ......................366  
Frame interval (Slide show) ..........288  
Frame rate ......................... 62, 104, 227  
Frame size/frame rate ...................... 62  
Framing grid ................................. 6, 325  
Frequency response (Movie  
settings) ............................................... 63  
Front-curtain sync ...........................191  
Full-frame playback ........................235  
Full-time servo AF .............................. 39  
FV lock ..................................................198  
FX (36 × 24) 1.0× ................................ 75  
FX format .............................................. 74  
FX-based (movie) format ................ 60  
F
Face-priority AF ...................................40  
File information ............................... 239  
File naming ........................................ 295  
File number sequence ................... 324  
Filter effects ....................................... 393  
Fine-tune optimal exposure ........ 318  
Firmware version ............................. 383  
Fisheye ................................................ 406  
Flash .........................189, 196, 198, 428  
Flash (White balance) .................... 148  
Flash bracketing ........... 133, 338, 339  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash .......... 331  
Flash compensation ....................... 196  
Flash mode ........................................ 191  
Flash only (Auto bracketing set) 133,  
Flash pop-up button ...................... 189  
Flash range ........................................ 195  
Flash shutter speed ...............193, 331  
Flash sync speed ........... 329, 330, 460  
Flash sync terminal ......................... 429  
Flash-ready indicator ...... 7, 189, 199,  
G
GPS .............................................. 233, 246  
GPS unit ...............................................233  
Green intensifier ...............................393  
Group-area AF .............................. 91, 92  
Flat (Set Picture Control) .............. 170  
Flexible program ............................. 118  
Flicker reduction .............................. 371  
Fluorescent (White balance) ....... 148  
Fn button ...................................343, 361  
f-number ...................................120, 424  
Focal length ...................231, 426427  
Focal plane mark ............................. 101  
Focus .............................................87101  
Focus indicator ................... 30, 96, 101  
Focus lock .............................................96  
Focus mode ................39, 87, 306, 307  
Focus point .... 29, 35, 40, 90, 94, 309,  
H
H.264 ....................................................480  
HDMI ........................................... 269, 485  
HDMI cable clip ..............................i, 269  
HDMI connector .......................... 2, 269  
Headphone volume .......................... 56  
Headphones ........................................ 56  
Help ........................................................ 25  
Hi ............................................................110  
Hide image .........................................281  
High definition ........................ 269, 485  
High Dynamic Range (HDR) .........184  
High ISO NR ........................................299  
Highlight display ................................ 56  
Highlight-weighted metering .....114  
Focus point illumination. ............. 309  
Focus point wrap-around ............ 310  
501  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Histogram ........................241, 242, 342  
Lens mount ......................................3, 15  
Lens mounting mark ....................2, 15  
Limit AF-area mode selection .....314  
Live view ........................................ 35, 49  
Live view button options ..............356  
Live view photography ................... 35  
Live view selector ....................... 35, 49  
Lo ...........................................................110  
Location data .......................... 233, 246  
Lock mirror up for cleaning .........448  
Long exposure NR ...........................299  
Lossless compressed (Type) .......... 81  
I
Image area ..42, 55, 59, 60, 74, 77, 83  
Image comment .............................. 375  
Image Dust Off ref photo ............. 369  
Image overlay ................................... 395  
Image quality .......................................79  
Image review ..................228, 236, 287  
Image size .............................................83  
Incandescent (White balance) .... 148  
Index marking .........54, 361, 362, 363  
Index print ......................................... 266  
In-focus indicator ...............30, 96, 101  
Information ..............................238, 282  
Information display ......201, 325, 326  
Interval timer shooting ................. 216  
ISO display and adjustment ........ 325  
ISO sensitivity ..........................109, 111  
ISO sensitivity step value .............. 315  
i-TTL ....................................189, 194, 430  
M
M (Manual focus) ..............................100  
M (medium) ................................... 60, 83  
Magnifying eyepiece ......................438  
Manage Picture Control ................177  
Manual (Exposure mode) ..............121  
Manual flash ......................................332  
Manual focus ..............................41, 100  
Matrix metering ..................... 114, 317  
Max. continuous release ...............322  
Maximum aperture ............... 229, 424  
Maximum sensitivity ......................112  
MB-D12 ...................................... 327, 328  
Memory buffer ..................................105  
Memory card ............. 14, 86, 366, 487  
Memory card capacity ...................489  
Metering .............................................114  
Microphone ................2, 3, 62, 63, 441  
Microphone sensitivity (Movie  
settings) ............................................... 62  
Miniature effect ................................409  
Minimum aperture ...................23, 117  
Minimum shutter speed ...............112  
Mired ....................................................154  
Mirror ......................................... 108, 448  
Mirror up ................................... 108, 448  
Mirror up mode ...................... 103, 108  
Modeling flash ...............117, 331, 338  
J
JPEG ........................................................79  
JPEG basic .............................................79  
JPEG compression .............................81  
JPEG fine ................................................79  
JPEG normal .........................................79  
JPEG/TIFF Recording ...................... 295  
L
L (large) ...........................................60, 83  
LAN ....................................................... 437  
Landscape (Set Picture Control) 170  
Language .................................... 18, 372  
LCD .......................................16, 326, 367  
LCD illumination .............................. 326  
Lens ......................15, 23, 231, 380, 419  
Lens distance information ........... 194  
Lens focus function buttons ....... 359  
Lens focus ring .......................... 41, 100  
502  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor .............. 31, 35, 201, 235, 367  
Monitor brightness .................. 56, 367  
Monitor color balance ................... 368  
Monitor cover ......................................10  
Monitor off delay ............................. 320  
Monitor pre-flash ...................194, 331  
Monochrome .................................... 392  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ..  
Movie ISO sensitivity settings (Movie  
settings) ...............................................64  
Movie live view ......................... 49, 361  
Movie quality (Movie settings) ......62  
Movie settings .....................................62  
Movie-record button ........................52  
Movies ....................................................49  
Multi selector ...................... 11, 25, 343  
Multiple exposure ........................... 209  
Multi-selector center button ....... 341  
My Menu ............................................. 414  
P
Page size .............................................265  
Perspective control .........................408  
Photo info ................................. 238, 282  
Photo live view display WB ............ 43  
PictBridge ................................. 263, 485  
Picture Control Utility .....................180  
Picture Controls ................................170  
Picture size .........................................426  
Playback .......................................31, 235  
Playback display options ..............282  
Playback folder .................................281  
Playback information ........... 238, 282  
Playback menu .................................280  
Playback zoom ..................................248  
Portrait (Set Picture Control) .......170  
Power aperture ....................... 361, 362  
Power connector .................... 436, 442  
Predictive focus tracking ................. 88  
Preset focus point .................. 342, 359  
Preset manual (White balance) ..148,  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway .......................................30, 128  
Primary slot .......................................... 86  
Print (DPOF) .......................................266  
Print options (PictBridge [Setup]  
menu) .................................................265  
Print select ..........................................266  
Printing ................................................263  
Programmed auto ...........................118  
Protecting photographs ................250  
Pv button ...................54, 117, 349, 362  
N
NEF (RAW) ...... 79, 80, 81, 82, 85, 295,  
NEF (RAW) bit depth .........................82  
NEF (RAW) processing ................... 399  
NEF (RAW) recording ....... 81, 85, 295  
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ....... 170  
Nikon Transfer 2 ............................... 258  
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup]  
menu) ................................................ 265  
Non-CPU lens ................. 229, 420, 424  
Normal-area AF ...................................40  
Number of focus points ................ 311  
Q
O
Quick retouch ....................................404  
Optimal quality (JPEG compression)  
R
Optional flash ................................... 428  
Overflow ................................................86  
Overview data .................................. 247  
Rank items (My Menu) ...................417  
Rear-curtain sync .............................192  
503  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recent settings ................................ 418  
Red intensifier .................................. 393  
Red-eye correction ......................... 389  
Red-eye reduction .......................... 191  
Release button to use dial ........... 353  
Release mode ................................... 102  
Remote cord ...................123, 439, 440  
Remove items (My Menu) ............ 416  
Removing the lens from the camera  
Repeating flash ................................ 331  
Reset .................................................... 206  
Resize ................................................... 401  
Restoring default settings ...206, 272  
Retouch menu .................................. 384  
Reverse indicators ........................... 354  
RGB .......................................79, 241, 296  
RGB Histogram ................................. 241  
Rotate tall ........................................... 288  
Shutter-release button ...30, 96, 128,  
Shutter-release button AE-L ........319  
Side-by-side comparison ..............412  
Single frame .......................................102  
Single-point AF ............................ 90, 92  
Single-servo AF ...................39, 87, 307  
Size ..........................................60, 83, 391  
Size priority (JPEG compression) .. 81  
Skylight ................................................393  
Slide show ..........................................288  
Slot empty release lock .................353  
Slot selection ..................168, 237, 385  
Slow sync ............................................191  
Smoothing .........................................186  
Soft ........................................................394  
Speedlights .............................. 189, 428  
Split-screen display zoom ....... 43, 44  
Spot ......................................................114  
Spot white balance .........................163  
Standard (Set Picture Control) ....170  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR ...  
S
S (small) ...........................................60, 83  
Save selected frame ..........................67  
Save/load settings .......................... 377  
Screen tips ......................................... 325  
SD memory card ..............14, 366, 487  
Secondary slot function ...................86  
Selective color .................................. 410  
Self-timer ..........................103, 106, 319  
Sensitivity ..................................109, 111  
Sepia (Monochrome) ..................... 392  
Set clock from satellite .................. 234  
Set Picture Control .......................... 170  
Setup menu ....................................... 365  
Shade (White balance) .................. 148  
Shooting data ................................... 243  
Shooting menu ................................ 290  
Shooting menu bank ..................... 291  
Shutter speed .................119, 121, 126  
Shutter speed lock .................126, 350  
Shutter-priority auto ...................... 119  
Standby timer .................. 34, 234, 319  
Start printing ........................... 265, 266  
Storage folder ...................................293  
Store by orientation ........................312  
Straighten ...........................................404  
Sub-dial frame advance ................352  
T
Television ............................................269  
Ten-pin remote terminal 3, 233, 439,  
Thumbnail ................................ 235, 342  
TIFF (RGB) ............................................. 79  
Time ......................................................123  
Time stamp (PictBridge) ................265  
Time zone ....................................18, 372  
Time zone and date .................18, 372  
Time-lapse photography ..............223  
504  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer ...........................................106, 216  
Trim ...................................................... 390  
Tripod ..................................40, 106, 123  
Two-button reset ............................ 206  
Type D lens ...............................419, 422  
Type G lens ...............................419, 422  
U
Uncompressed (Type) ......................81  
USB ..............................................257, 263  
USB cable ...............................i, 257, 263  
USB cable clip ................................ i, 258  
UT-1 ...................................................... 437  
UTC ..............................................234, 246  
V
Viewfinder ...............................6, 17, 475  
Viewfinder eyepiece ................ 23, 106  
Viewfinder focus ....................... 17, 438  
Viewfinder grid display ................. 325  
Viewing photographs on TV ....... 269  
ViewNX 2 .................. 80, 253, 373, 376  
Vignette control ............................... 297  
Virtual horizon ...........46, 58, 347, 379  
Vivid (Set Picture Control) ............ 170  
W
Warm filter ......................................... 393  
WB ................................................139, 148  
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)  
White balance ..........................139, 148  
White balance bracketing ...139, 338  
Wide-area AF ........................................40  
Wind noise reduction (Movie  
settings) ...............................................63  
Wireless network ....................261, 437  
Wireless remote controller .. 61,357,  
Wireless transmitter ..............261, 437  
WT-5 ............................................261, 437  
505  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Convection Oven H 5040 B User Manual
Nokia Headphones HS 20 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL169050 User Manual
Onkyo Speaker System Ls 3100 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX SR604E User Manual
Packard Bell Laptop LJ65 User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder AG DVX100P User Manual
Panasonic Laptop CF 71 User Manual
Panasonic Laptop CF C1 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 2707D User Manual